Home

Paragon PSG-155-SEG-TLA1

Contents

1. Select mew size 393 371 06 Mie 289 776 MB 496 975 22 MB i Cimet volume size 384 1 GB The volume size has been increased on 101 1 GB Result After the operation is completed free space of the specified partition will be increased by up taking the on disk unallocated space and the unused space of other partitions Undeleting Partitions When simply deleting a partition without additional wiping disk management software only removes references to it in the Partition Table thus leaving the possibility to recover it later CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 104 The program enables to find and recover these partitions A restored partition will be fully functional as long as other partitions were not created moved or exceeded the disk space occupied by that partition That is why the program offers this function only for blocks of free space The operation can be accomplished with the Undelete Partition Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Undelete Partition Wizard e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Undelete Partitions e Onthe Common Tasks Bar click the Undelete Partition item of the Wizards menu e Select a block of free space on the Disk Map and click the Recover Lost Partitions item on the page that appears in the Explorer Bar e Call the popup menu for the block of free space right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Reco
2. oooocccncoonnnnonnnonnnonaconnonanonnnnnaconnnnanonnonanonnonanonnnonacnnnnnos 164 Recovery SCOOTER AAA ARA 167 FIXING MBR after a DOOt VITUSiattacK anar aeceacedacavaaeagueaharitece vawteedcaseiaaWueckeesaeeeiaeea easels 167 Fixing Windows Startup ADIITY AAA ees 169 Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule ccccccccsseccccesscccceesececeeseccecesececeeececseecesseeceessuecessegeceeeeees 173 Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD ooooccccnnnnccnncnnnnnnnnnnononananacccnnncnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnanancconocacananonononoss 176 Restoring a system partition from a network drive srra a a 179 Restoring a system partition Trona MOCOS ocbauwelabeasadeeSaanneinaled aslasince anid ties 183 Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive ccccccsscccccseccccessececeesececcuecceceusecessesececseneceseeneeceseuecessugeceesenes 186 RESTON a THE Ice Met caba 189 Restoring a file increment tO a partition DACKUP cccccccessecccesececcesecccceesececsusececeeseceeseusecessuecessunecesseeeeeeseenecetsugeceesenss 191 Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk occccooccnccncnnnnocnnonacinonaninonananonacnnononinnacononaso 195 Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD oooonnccncnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonananacccnnnnanononononononononananancncnncnnnnnnnnnnanoss 198 Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partitiON ooccccocccc
3. 48 Refresh the contents of the current page Partition List The Partition List is another helpful tool that enables you to get a clear cut picture of the current state of the system hard disks partitions Partitions are sorted according to their starting position For every item of the list there is the possibility to call the context sensitive popup menu with available operations Besides the program provides detailed information on all hard disks partitions found in the system including the following properties Name Volume label if exists Partition type Primary Extended Logical File system type Size Amount of used and unused free space Start End cylinder Start End head Start End sector Free size in sectors bytes Active Inactive attribute Hidden Unhidden attribute You may customize outlook of the Partition List by clicking on the arrow icon on the top right side of the panel Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 49 Q Please select properties to display Feasa select properties you would lite to display in the Disks and Partitions view nama Size entop FS Size hedom Used sactors Start sectors End sectors at CHS rex End CHSihex di Fa LE AL A AA Aa a Type Ple systom Volume labe Partkion Sra Ge Used g i Pros eciona Free Activa or Latar Partition ID Daciana par Cluster Slot By marking a
4. 173 11 Confirm the operation h Apply the changes 12 After the operation is completed click the Report button to see a well informative summary page The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog _ Reporting Report Paragon Boot Canectors Repon Operations perlormed Operation 1 Change drive leners Partition targeted Hard disk 0 Partition 0 Info System Rooi folder is Status Successful Date and Time 2009 Jan 14 Wed 16 14 16 Ta go to the begin ming click here 13 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 14 Reboot the computer Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got the bootable backup capsule containing a backup of your hard disk That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your hard disk from a backup image contained in the backup capsule when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the bootable backup capsule By default the program offers to use the F1 hot key to boot from it amp Floppy disk Main recovery Hin XP environment A A Safe Mode Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 174 N This scenario implies that th
5. 2 If you ve installed several operating systems on one partition we can only add drivers to the latest version of OS Microsoft highly recommends that you install an operating system on a separate partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 32 3 Please note drivers are not cached during selection That s why if you select a driver to add to the system but it s already unavailable during the operation the program will end the operation with an error Paragon Hot Processing Volume Shadow Copy Service Offline versus Online Data Processing In the course of time there have been developed various methods of data processing Despite different work concept all of them can be divided into two principal groups offline cold and online hot data processing techniques As the name infers offline data processing can only be accomplished when the data is in consistent state the operating system and all the applications are completely shut down Actually it is the most preferable way of image creation or data cloning since software can obtain an exclusive right to process data that guaranties high level of operating efficiency However the offline data processing is absolutely out of question when dealing with 24 7 production environments In contrast online data processing enables to create a consistent snapshot even as the data is currently modified It is particularly useful for systems with high av
6. 2 Inthe opened dialog provide an IP address a network mask default gateway etc for your network device Obtain an IP address automaticaly 7 Usa the following IP address SEF SEE 444 en i a Aa E A G Advanced Loadiomte Savetotie ior c 3 Click the Network drivers tab to map a network share 4 Click Map Network Drive and provide all the necessary information to map a network share in the opened dialog e Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it e Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters e Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 241 By clicking Disconnect Drive you can delete an existing network share if necessary 5 Click the Network identification tab to change a network name of your computer generated automatically and a workgroup name Computer Name AAA ee _ ma mi iT LF PUJA i Workagrauin Primary DNS suffi 6 By default the wizard saves all network settings in the netconf ini file located on the WinPE RAM drive thus it will only be available until you restart the computer However you can just once configure your network device and th
7. 92 On this page you can sect har dex and ine piece where lo create a new partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Dia i i Local Disk C W data Fake 029 58 38 weer a A a le pee 11 ab he Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dew j k Local Disk 7 k eso 9GBNTFS Basic GPT Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l ts td Unallocated The partition wall be created here id Usa tha buitons lo move the maker or drag marker by mouse A new partition wil be created where the makar is EL By default the program allows you to create a new partition only as the last primary or as IN the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can remove this restriction that in its turn might result in some boot problems e Partition size There is no restriction on size of the future partition merely depending on space available on the hard disk If there is not enough free space in one block the wizard enables to redistribute free space joining all free space blocks together into one united block and moving partitions when necessary If the total amount of free space is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of space from one of the existing partitions thus resizing it Your hard disk before the changes Basic GPT Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtua
8. ae ma ii mj Fi i ya provide more effective A D OS spose a tt te mii om al Pages Grier now Charter silo m sectors bai A The Cluster Size value is expressed in Sectors Per Cluster To get the Cluster Size in Kbytes divide it into half 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Making Logical Primary The program allows you to include a primary partition in the extended partition or exclude a logical partition from the extended partition without partition duplication In order to change a partition type you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a primary or logical partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Make Partition Logical Primary dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Modify gt Make Partition Logical Primary e On the Explorer bar click on the current partition type B Are you sure you wani to make the partition logical YOu are Sout to mare the paimen C No label NTFS logea The Make Primary gt Logical option is only available when the selected partition is adjacent to the extended partition and vice versa y The Make Primary gt Logical option of the system partition will result in inability to boot the operating system The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 112 Changing Partitio
9. Chick the check box next to any file or folder you want to beck up Name a E de AppData El Je Application Data E El Bl Cookies a Mk g Es it 5 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Local Disk C My system backup A ER Y Sine Date 7 A a a N F 9 2 2009 5 05 42 AM 9 2 2009 5 20 26 AM Size 157 9 2 2009 2 41 04 AM 196GB 922009 23732 AM Total size 4999GB Free space 4914GB G anc_system arc_system_PBF 7 14 2009 12 14 28 AM F132 7 37 05 PM 74112009 9 53 35 PM 7132009 45355 PM 7 132009 7 04 25 PM 71132009 9 53 55 PM 74132009 704725 PM 7 112009 7 04 35 FM 7132009 70425 FM 1132009 95355 PM 11132009 7 04 25 PM 2132009 9 53 55 PM 74132009 9 53 35 PM 7132009 7 04 25 FM 4132009 9 53 55 PM 74112009 9 53 55 PM mi 158 Include masks manage files and folders that wil be added to the archive F imciude mask is speciied al the files that do not conform to the mask wil be omited and will not get into the archive o Use include masks Readable files 15 fies Rename category chm him himi pdf Delete fier Delete filter Delete fher ixi hip rti doc xls J m 5 A E You can also create your own filter by clicking the Add category button e Name Give to the filter any name you l
10. Co Fees Basic Disk O VMware Virtual IDE Hard D Bask Disk 1 24 279Gb __ HTFS ntls4backup Basic Disk 0 Size 112 Gb Primary Free Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 189 A N All contents on disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Your partitions before operations Your partitions a er operations Apple HFS leopard NM NTFS Ho label 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Restore partition or disk _ Operation progress Time elapsed 00 00 16 Time to finish 00 26 24 Copied sofar 192 0 Mb Read so far 192 0 Mb 24 0 Mb s To copy 14 0Gb Write so far 192 0 Mb 33 4 Mb s Overall progress Po Convening disk 0 to GPT Opening archive ko_vista_0000p 000 Restore Primary partition 0 disk 0 from file 18 0528 hddleo_vistafleo_vista_0000p 000 Data writing Opening archive lko_vista_0001p 000 Restore Primary partition 1 disk 0 from file 19 0528 hdd leo_viztafleo_vista_0001p 000 Data writing 12 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer Restoring a file increment Let s assume t
11. Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 186 System restart is required to complete he operation Wha would you like to do C and cannot be completed without sysiem restar After restart the operation wil conte in boottime mode Do not turn off the computer until the Ep Fiat the commuter Please conic restart of your computer The operation wil be contrued after system restar E gt Retry om The operation cannot be completed wiihoul restart because some files are in use and prevent exclusive access lo the volume YW as prevent opami ajaa T e ea peren Opera mjn n 8 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Suboperation progress Restore partition or disk __ Hork tine00 00 55 Tine to finish00 00 26 Done 521 MBE Read 532 MB 35 2 MB s All 8 71 GB Hrite 532 MB 53 2 MB s Overall progress LL__ _ WL Loading Paragon Engine Copyright Copyright 1988 2008 Paragon Technologie GabH Ll rights reserved Please wait Universal File System Driver initialization Getting partitions info Restore Primary partition disk 0 from file G arc_systes arc_sustes PBF Data writing To avoid data loss please do not reset or turn off the computer Operation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the
12. Automate a partition backup CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 40 One Button Copy Wizard Create a hard disk copy just by pressing one button Copy Hard Disk Create a hard disk copy Schedule Hard Disk Copy Set a timetable for a hard disk copy Copy Partition Create a partition copy Schedule Partition Copy Set a timetable for a partition copy Hard Disk Back Up Hard Disk Create a backup archive of the selected hard disk Back up the selected hard disk and burn the resulted image to CD DVD Burn Hard Disk to CD or DVD Restore Hard Disk Restore the selected hard disk from a backup image Convert to Basic Convert a dynamic MBR disk containing simple volume s into a basic MBR disk Convert to Basic MBR Convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volume s into a basic MBR disk Update MBR Master Boot Record of the selected hard disk ge Primary Slots Modify the primary partitions enumeration for the selected hard disk Create a copy of the selected hard disk Irreversibly destroy all on disk information Edit View Sectors View edit sectors of the selected hard disk perties Get in depth information on the properties of selected hard disk Partition Create a partition Format a partition Delete a partition p Partition Create a backup archive of the selected partition Back up the selected partition and burn the resulted image to CD D
13. O 0000000090 Ox0000000040 Ox00000000B0 Ox00000000C0 O 00000000D0 O x00000000E0 Ox00000000F0 00000000100 OxO0000000110 0x0000000120 00000000130 0x0000000140 Ox0000000150 0 0000000160 00000000170 OxX0000000160 Ox0000000190 Ox00000001A0 Ox0000000180 O 00000001C0 Ox00000001D0 Ox00000001E0 Ox00000001F0 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 34 EM I A i l as rr ant y UEF EF Ana D Jr Aiu A t pF f SiR fyv hh ih h h B Y 4ST ee ee Y v M n 1 tas b N u 023 1 1 8 gt b U univ u Ned Be l yed u a 1 ffAu 4T CP u r fh E b fb S5t ae th 1 Zac amp e p 2a A so sp rEsde s Alnvalid parti tion table Error loading operati ng systen Hissin g operating syst sn A 138 A N Careless use of the Edit Sectors function may result in the irreversible data corruption Send Log Files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind is stored in Log files In order to send log files to the Paragon Support Team you should take t
14. a Available operation scenarios e Hard Disk Utilization Task Scheduling Automation of operations can really help you out when you ve got to accomplish certain routine operations on a regular basis as it enables to execute them without your involvement while optimizing your computer s work load Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 122 Setting a Timetable Thanks to the embedded Scheduler you can set a timetable for execution of any operation It has two categories for time settings these correspond to appropriate items in the Schedule type menu e Initiating the operation by an event One time only i e the Once item When the system starts i e the At System Startup item When the user logs on i e the At Logon item e Initiating the operation periodically i e Daily Weekly Monthly Plesse specty how and when would you like to perform the task You need to select one of the variants Depending on your choice the scheduler displays a form that enables to set a timetable Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task Shutdown system after backup J Generate unique names for scheduled backups Run the task on 0402 2009 al 1200 AM 7 Every 1 weskis on Monday Friday Tuesday Saturday Wednesday Sunday Thursday Do mot nun the task ate To run the task in the log off mode please specify administering login info by following the appropriate
15. amp Address C Name Dais a di arc images VVA A fj wc_new VAA Hawak Places Ji archdb A a Li achive _db A D Ji Perfiogs A H Je Program Files WAA gt Je Users am j di Ubs e11 E Je Windows VLA 5 Click the OK button to accomplish the operation The current version of the program does not enable to access file archives with Volume Explorer Resize Scenarios Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest of data Let s assume that you re a rank and file user who is most likely to have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system To secure yourself against a system malfunction or a virus attack you ve got nothing to do but make a backup of the whole partition which besides the operating system itself contains all your family photos favorite films and music program distributives whatever As a result you ll get a very huge backup image You can easily tackle this issue however by detaching your operating system from the rest of data To create a new partition on your hard disk please do the following Express Launcher Click Switch to Full Scale Launcher in the Express Launcher 1 Click the Express Create Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Choose a method you find the most suitable to create the partition The wizard is especially desi
16. click the Next button On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Type Creation Date Source Object Size Fags Co Mounted a 9 2 2009 5 20 25 AM New Volume F 2 468 5 3 2 2009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk C 495 9 GB f i 9 2 2009 2 21 15 AM Local Disk 7 509 8 MB H han 922009 2 21 10 AM Local Disk 7 14GB MA zi y Local Disk C My system backup No label NTFS Total size 49799 GB 25GB Free space 4914GB Gmt siem oe pem PEF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description A N To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved No label NTFS 85GB To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 Onthe What folders and files to back up page you can see contents of the selected partition archive Mark a checkbox opposite a file or folder to build up contents of the future incremental image
17. delete CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 99 On this page you can choose a volume you would ike to delete Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SOS Disk Dev Q data Z 217 GB NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Hi W Local Disk 4399 9GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev i ig Unallocated 569 8GB A You are shout io destroy a bootable partition a A N As a result of this operation contents of the selected partition will be lost e Merge free blocks As a result of the operation you may get several blocks of the unallocated space on the hard disk So choose whether to merge them all and place at the beginning of the disk or at the end by selecting the required operation from the pull down list Merge free blocks options Do not merge free blocks rs Marge free blocks al the end Of ihe disk fret blocks at the beginning of the disk Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests you just to remove references to the selected partition from the Partition Table Ea tai Are you sure you wani to delete volume F You ane about to delete volume F No label NTFS Your computer may no longer boot or work comectiy 7 Do nat ask volume label next time e Enter the volume label to confirm deleting To confirm deletion of the selected partition enter its Volume Label T
18. h You may only decrease the current cluster size e Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Changing Cluster Size Cluster size is one of the crucial parameters of any file system Its value implicitly affects the performance of the files input output activity since it defines the size of the file system metadata Besides the so called waste space factor also depends on the cluster size In order to change the cluster size of a partition you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Cluster Size dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Modify gt Change Cluster Size CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 111 e On the Explorer bar click on the current sectors per cluster value 3 Define the cluster size for the partition This parameter can have a profound effect on the overall performance Ina nutshell larger clusters waste more space but generally provide for slightly better performance because of less fragmentation So be particularly careful with it Beas b Are you sure you wani to change cluster size for partition C Dureri cluster sre is 8 sectors 4 KB 4 096 Bytes Smaber custes may
19. its features defined by the wizard Dialog Work Algorithm All backup dialogs share similar work algorithm as well Unlike wizards settings of a backup dialog concentrate on a single page That s why it cannot boast high level of the self descriptiveness Anyway with the context sensitive hint system you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the dialog just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need A N We recommend the program s dialogs for experienced users mostly So let us just take as an example the Partition Backup Dialog to describe its work algorithm Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Partition Backup Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main menu Partition gt Back Up Partition Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Back Up Partition CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 77 Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Backup button to confirm the operation Are you sure you wart to backup volume F New Volume NTFS You are about lo backup F New Volume NTFS This slows you to create the backup mage of your data Archive nama ac 020509115757759 Arch
20. ola iaa 34 CODY ODClATIONS iaa dada 34 Drive Part itiOnNiINE ice 35 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Data SanitiZzatiON cuida a idaiaos 35 Snell oliita 36 Windows Components s ssesesessesessesescecsecoscesosoesesoecsesoecessecesosoesesoesessesesosoesossecesoesesseseseesee 36 Interlace OVEN OW orsa a caca adiciona 36 General Layout ea E ds 36 ME a e EE E Goenka Saxaadeb lege tke nyaeacemieaase ta unncaadacdatataus 38 TOOB O 42 Mia Opera tons Barea leon end a ad on eb cabs 42 Common TASKS Bara aos 43 A O O A A A E 45 EON Cie eM O 46 Paro ais 48 Properties Baton ic 49 WE OIG Bale 25 AENEA AE T EEE AE TEAT A AEREA EETA ace A A AT AT 50 SCIUS Ba Ea E E E N N E E A dacec tometer nee eeG ee giaeesy 50 SELTINES OVENVICW ani as 50 General O DUO INS untar ricas 51 Back Mate OPUS o ai 52 Parutionine OPIO Sis aricnianddsalcoiaac iniciada ici ici iaa cia 53 General CODY ANd BACKUP ODLIONS neern aora bidcs 54 ED DVD RECO col MOL Sr oa 55 Hot Processine ODIOS aan aaa 56 le ala q PA 57 EMANAN 59 Operation Dependency OPON Si rd 60 VIBE OA S OPINAS E 61 File System Conversi n DLIONS srisnida daria lidia a E liado 62 Copy Backup Exclude Opos acacia caia 63 CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Fle Backup Exclude ODTIOMS oia 64 Ele BackUp Include ODON eenean aa aa a a 65 OS PIES ORO as 66 WIDE ODIOS a a T ola wide sataaisniapsaacna eon ueradondanseenonenes 67 Getting I
21. with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree System restart is required to complete the operation What would you like to do The operation Redisiribule partitions needs eeclueve access to the volume C and cannot be completed without system restart After restart the operation wil Gontinwe in boottime mode Do mot tum off the computer until the operalion Ew Restan the computer Please conim restar of your computer The operation will be continued after RET rear gt Ep Retry Manuafy close used thes and retry the operation ia 7 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 213 suboperation progress Redistribute partitions Work tinmed0 01 15 Time to finish00 00 05 Done 0 77 Mb Read 72 Hb 4 0 Mbs All Oo Mb Hrite 0 0 Hb 0 0 Mb s Overall progress A S SS Quick data moving Flushing systems buffers please walt Modifying drive t on hard disk O Checking paraneters Scanning dir structure Scanning data structure may be a few Minutes Jo not reset or turn off your computer to avoid the data loss Jperation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation After comple
22. 10 36 AM Total size 444 KB 454 737 Bytes Archive size 3928 KB 402 229 Bytes Fie Cy are_imagesFL 12596967 101449515 7 archive ph Base archive Co arc_images FLO0O000000000000000 archive ph To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Lookin E Archives 5 5 3 Hare Sune Crate E Archives G3 gt Je ae dsk 9 2 2009 5 25 00 AM E bp arc_doc 92 2009 5 05 42 AM gt Ji arc_images 9 3 2009 3 57 21 AM E gt Ji a 030909105713295 9 3 2009 3 57 22 AM OB ar_030909105713295 PBF 689 KB 9 3 2009 3 57 22 AM ac images PB AMO VELAR AU db AM gt Fies ol type Archive files 5 Name Local Disk Volume label No label Fie system NTFS Total size 24GB Used space 363 MB Fee space 3GB Fila Gv arc_mages d f_030909105713236 4_030909105 13295 PBF To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 191 4 On the How to Restore page specify the way your archive will be resto
23. 2009 7 04 25 PM de Documents 7 132009 9 53 55 PM El Je Downloads 7 13 2009 70425 PM de Favores 713 2009 7 04 25 FM Links 7132009 70425 FM 3 El J Local Settings 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM de Music 11132009 7 04 25 PM EA PA My Documenta 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM Ji NetHood 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM Je Pictures 13 2009 7 04 25 PM E Je PontHood 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM a E Ji Recent 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM di Saved Games MISA TIAS PM To continue chck Next 4 Onthe Backup Destination page select a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned disk as a backup destination Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 122009 5 05 42 AM 9 2 2009 520026 AM 9 2 2009 2 41 04 AM Edit the archive name if necessary Archive name are 030909084734578 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Include masks manage files and folders that wil be added to the archive F include mask is specified all the files that do not conform lo the mask wil be omiled and wil not get into the De net use include masks al fles wil be included into the archive al chm Delete fitter button OU You can use wildcards and Pto specdy the mask e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 153 e Filt
24. Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 110 e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Convert file system e On the Explorer bar click on the current file system type e Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map or on the Partition List then select the menu item Convert File System 3 Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Convert button to confirm the operation Ea Are you sure you wami to convert system volume 0 17 You ane about to convert fle system on volume C No label NTFS Your computer may no onger FOOT OF WORK COMmaciy Please select new fle system Select mew Huser are e New file system From the pull down list choose a file system you would like to convert to Actually the program only displays variants available for the operation taking into account the current parameters of the selected partition and limitations of the used file system e New cluster size Define the cluster size for the partition This parameter can have a profound effect on the overall performance In a nutshell larger clusters waste more space but generally provide for slightly better performance because of less fragmentation So be particularly careful with it The cluster size value is expressed in sectors per cluster To get it in Kbytes please divide it A N into half
25. CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 236 The Vizard has not appbed your changes yet On this page you can ether accept or reconsider the Please note f you socept the changes the Vizard vel physically perform al operations so you won be able to interrupt this process or unde the changes may take same time to apply the changes You may also be asked to restart your computer during that Process Would you lite to apply your changes Yes ap fly the changes physically No bet m reconsider After the operation is completed your system will be bootable on the new hardware Hard Disk Optimization To defragment an NTFS or FAT partition please do the following Express Launcher A You must have administrator s privileges to accomplish defragmentation of the system partition 1 Click the Security and Optimization button and then select Defragment Partition 2 Inthe main window select a partition you want to defragment on the Disk Map Hage Hard Dick 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5251 Msk Dev peo i E New Volume F IMM 152 7 GE NTFS 341 2GB NTFS Total size 158 7 GB Used 11 4 GB Local Disk E Free 147 3 GB 268368 NTFS Banc Hard Disk 1 VMware 3 Launch the Defragment Partition dialog by calling the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button and then selecting the menu item Defragment Partition Basic Hard Dek 0 VMware VMware Virtu
26. Correct drive leners in the System Registry O Edit the Boot ini file Correct the partition boot record Adjust OS to boot on new hardware To continue click Next 8 On the next page choose a hard disk from the pull down list if several then the required partition If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item Panitions List Leners Map Below you can choose a hard disk drive and see all partitions on i information about drive letters assigned lo these panitions is taken from the System Registry of the Windows installation selected Basic Disk 0 W 40 0 Gb VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive N Type active File System Volume label Size Drivelemers Primary NTFS WinxP 30 Gb a Primary o NTFS Application 9 8Gb E Primary BackupCapsul Mo label 10 0 Gb lt None gt Primary Free 17 Gb lt None gt Edit leners 9 Click the Edit Letters button to correct an existing drive letter or assign a new one in the Windows System Registry Partinans List Drive letters it Information about drive letters f ihe Windows installation selected Drive leners dy lt None gt E lt a Fae y lt None gt Recommended to try C If used you can release iin Letiers Map 10 Once you ve assigned the appropriate drive letter close the dialog then click the Apply button CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved
27. Dialog Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Format Partition Wizard Express Launcher Click the Partitioning button and then select Format Partition Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Format Partition e On the Common Tasks bar click the Format Partition item of the Wizards menu Dialog Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Format Partition Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Format Partition e Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Format Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to format Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to format CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved E i j Lan Ts page FOU Can 2NO0sA VORUITHE you voed me oO format Basc Hard Lisk U VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Ask Lev 1 Local Disk C Ml 202 98 NTFS e P de w data 2 elf GB NTFS Basic Hard Dick 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev g Local Disk F 453 368 NTFS Base GPT Hard Msk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 sk Dev LO Cnalocaled AN As a result of this operation contents of the
28. Disk Dev intemal Hard Disk Driv 7 eo The sre of obsects lo back up 499 9 GB Estimated archive size 7 2 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate A N checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 5 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to the Backup Capsule option There are several ways the Wizard can store your dats Plesse select how would you like to save ihe active Save data to the Backup Capsule Save data to local netwoek dives Save data to physical partitions Save data to FTP locations Bum the data to CO or DVD 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Please speciy the archive name Archive name wil be used as a subfolder where backup data fies wil be sared Archive delads Archive name arc 03050907 1001085 Estimated archive size 446G Space avalsble on backup destination 38 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space delete outdated backups from the Backup Capsule or resize it with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Plaase enter a hor commet to describe the archive E Ry Mo comment 8 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time ta
29. Dynamic Disk Management DDM The problem is that earlier versions of Windows do not support DDM In addition most hard disk utilities do not support it as well Recovery Media is a CD DVD disc a USB flash card or even a floppy disk from which you can boot for maintenance or recovery purposes Root Directory is the top level directory of a formatted logical drive to include other files and directories In modern file systems Ext2 Ext3 NTFS and even FAT32 it does not differ from other directories This is not the case for old FAT12 and FAT16 file systems Serial Number In the DOS partitioning scheme every hard disk and every partition has a 32 bit serial number represented by an 8 figure hexadecimal value It is stored in the MBR and its value is assigned when the MBR sector is initialized by Microsoft standard disk managing tools such as Windows Disk Administrator and the FDISK utility In fact a hard disk s serial number is not important for most operating systems and software It is known that Windows NT 2000 and XP store its value in the database of assigned drive letters A partition s serial number is stored in its boot sector in FAT16 FAT32 and NFTS file systems Its value is assigned when the partition is formatted It does not play an important role for most operating systems and software as well Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved
30. Explorer Mame Size odd ed E QUCO DVO Drives fe GD Hard Disks Mi a E 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dew 500 GB E 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Devi 10 GB 0 GP 1 Primary FATI2 E 34GB 22 Primary NTFS F 24GB eee aE 9 2 2009 4 15 34 AM RNE as 9 2 2009 4 24 46 AM H I Prr 14GB 574 Prmary Linux Swap 609 9 MB H F 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Devi 20GB E E E 4 VMware Vitwara Virtual S SCSI Disk Devi GPT Disk B El val Doves Call the popup menu for the selected file folder right click of the mouse button to export it to some other location local or network drive etc a 5 OVD RW Drive D i Local Disk E E Local Disk F E E Archives 15 a E New Volume H Available operation scenarios e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup File Transfer Wizard File Transfer Wizard is designed to make such operations as copying of separate files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible It may be of particular use in case of a system malfunction caused either by a virus attack or files corruption in order to get the system back on track again Besides it provides access to Paragon backups as regular folders to browse through their contents or copy required files Startup There are several ways to start the File Transfer Wizard Express Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Grou
31. Hard Disk Manager Are you sure you wani to move resize volume E You are about to move resize NTFS volume No label E Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Volume size S11 997MB we 101 MB 511 397 MB Free space before 10 97 ME Obytes 511 291 43 MB Free space after Bytes Obytes 511 888 18 MB Sectorto sector move Select this option to move partition areas that dont contain any data This allows you to keap the parbbens content afier move matii as E wes but wi maguire more time Disk z gt Volume 3 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the left by the drag and drop technique While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space Click the Yes button to continue Are you sure you want to move resize volume E You are about to movevresize NTFS volume No label E Basic Hard Disk 1 Viware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev 2 gees f Local Disk E 262 3 GB NTFS Volume size 274 790 519MB fe 101 MB 511 993 MB Free space before 0 97 MB afe O bytes 511 851 43 MB Free space after 23720152 MB fe Obytes 511 893 61 ME Fl Sactorto sector move Select this opbon lo move partion areas that don contain any data This alovwes you lo keep the pa
32. Mb A ie Basic Disk 0 VMware Virtual 120 Gb p be ee E 7 C NTFS Bb NTFS Data 8 Choose the data partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 9 Move the slider to the right to increase size of the partition Click OK to continue Parniion preview oO NTFS Data New size B 102101 Mb Free space before 0 102093 Mb Free space afer 0 102093 Mb 10 Apply the pending changes Applying changes 2 pending operations Apply changes You have pending op 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 220 Operations list Suboperation progress I Move parion Pd 2 Move partition Operation progress TE Time eclapsed 00 00 58 Time to finish 01 35 42 Copied so far 248 5 Mb Read so far 365 9 Mb 7 8 Mb s To copy 7 9Gb Write so far 251 2 Mb 46 0 Mbs Overall progress EN Data morini Creating new partition Moving drive dev sda0 on hard disk 0 Scanning data structure may be a few minutes Restan enabled Data blocks calculating Quick data moving Resizing partitions of Apple Boot Camp Let s assume you re a Boot Camp user who s got Windows XP as the second operating system Initially allocated space for the Windows partition has
33. Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Start the command line 4 In the main window select the required hard disk if several on the Disk Map Hard Disk Partition Operations Wizards Help Bask Disk O VMware Y waj 120Gb 3 age of ha D NTFS Data Disk from isk Basic Disk 0 Size 120 Gb Cc Primary NTFS 444Gb 16b 36 2 Gb 1 D Primary AT FS 75 6 Gb 4 5 Mb 756 Gb 5 Choose your system partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Basic Disk 0 VMware Virtual 120 Gb C NTFS Vista 6d Se Create an image of partition Alt B Burn an image of partition io CODWYD Restore partition from image AR Bask Disk 0 Size 1 id Copy panition AC 0 CE Prima 1 D Prima Create AIN Formal Alt F Delete AltD Wipe parition ARW Clear free space Raso Move Unmouni Modify b 6 Inthe opened dialog set a new size for the partition by moving the slider or by entering the exact value in the appropriate field While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green Click OK to continue CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 219 Partition preview New size 8323 45434 Mb Free space before 0 37111 Mb I bid il Free space afer 0 37111
34. Operabon dependency opbors E VIL mode opbaris FE PREM Ceo OPORA Copy Backup exclude options Ha Backup exude options h i A Fie Backup include opbons Wipe options In this section you can specify a storage life span for the stubact log file e Infinite not to empty the file ever e Minimal to have the file emptied all the time e Custom to set a certain storage life span for the file Please note once the defined period has been expired the file will be emptied We strongly recommend you not to choose the Minimal option as in case of having A N problems with the program our Support Team won t be able to study operation logs thus help you out CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 67 Wipe Options TO Edit settings S g General options E ane Backup image options ES Wipe options Dang no GHN e a mi a im mi rt ER TF f Copy and backup opticns Default wipe method ha pm rm m a CO OORT Gothen Paf S90 991 uria la E le Jn A es e a us Lao Bre eel la Hol processing options A Run duina bazkun entians Overnwie al addressable locations with a character is complement then a rando A y T e e e e Sad els character and werty Operation dependency options Virtua mode optin Fle system conversion options Copy Backup exciude options cm ala ae ee ele Backup include cotens am s ETA DES ATEO Here you can set a
35. ReiserFS Apple HFS Status Bar This is the bottom part of the main window The Status Bar displays menu hints for each item the cursor points to The user can hide or show the bar with the appropriate Main Menu item View gt Status Bar Settings Overview The Settings dialog is available from the Main Menu Tools gt Settings All the settings are grouped into several sections which functions are described in the following paragraphs The list of sections is placed on the left side of the dialog By selecting a section from the list you can open a set of options A To get a detailed description to any setting control or field of the program just click the hint button and then the object you need CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 51 General Options Edit settings General options oS General options Backup image options A AA arttioning options Copy and backup option Enable data loss probecti n e r r Pia i s IS corn Options Choose this option io ensure that no data will be lost system unexpectedly got Hol processing options down because of power shortage eic Run during backup options Emal opbons Operation dependency options tual mode Coton Pie system conversion oplions Copy Backup exciuce options Fla Backup exclude options He Backup include opbona Log has options ge nipe Opos 3 Ca This section contains a set of general options that will
36. ReiserFS Disk Map is synchronized with the Explorer Bar Thus by selecting a disk on the Disk Map the Explorer Bar will automatically display detailed information on it A The drag and drop functionality is not available when the logarithmic type of the disk layout is selected Explorer Bar The Explorer Bar is located in the center of the main window which emphasizes its importance The bar displays reference information including e The help system e General information on the product including its name version and a list of helpful links e Detailed information about disks selected on the Disk Map e List of scheduled operations e List of scripts e List of archives e Volume Explorer utility e Disk Editor utility According to these categories the Explorer Bar has several tabs e Disk View which offers the user the following options Partition List to get a clear cut picture of the current state of the system hard disks partitions Disk Editor to view edit sectors of the selected partition hard disk Volume Explorer to browse and export contents of the selected partition hard disk Properties to view detailed information on the selected partition hard disk in the bright graphical form You can switch between these three components by clicking tabs on the left side of the IN Explorer Bar CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 47 e Scheduled Tasks which gives the user the possibi
37. Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS safe mode In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu e Floppy Disk Reboot the computer from a system floppy disk e Hard Disk 0 Boot from the primary hard disk Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 24 e Find OS s on your hard disks The program will scan hard disks of your computer to find any bootable operating system To move within the menu please use the arrow keys of the computer keyboard While working with the recovery environment you might experience some inconvenience caused by possible video artifacts It is just a result of changing video modes and in no way IN will affect the program functionality If this is the case please wait a bit and everything will be OK Normal Mode When the Normal mode is selected the Linux launch menu appears You can create delete and format hard disk Partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan mow Upon the start please select the drive and one of its partitions or its free space Then activate the Partion pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Paragon Hard Disk Manager Simple Restore Wizard One Button Copy Wizard Wipe Wizard Express Resize Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Contgurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Start the co
38. Sanitization method You can create your own Data Sanitization method 4 The next page of the wizard enables to get detailed information on the selected algorithm choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check and estimate the time required to accomplish the operation Wipe method US DoD 5220 22 M Overarta al addreasab e locations wih a character ie complement then a random character and verty Erase passes count 3 Werfy passes count 1 Percentage of sectors lo check 100 Aporimate wips time 14 02 40 You can skp verfyrig completely er pati by daabing E or redyong percentage of sectors to check Plesse note i would be a deviation fem US DoD 5220 22 M 5 Review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary You hard dsk before the changes Local Disk C zis GE NTFS Your hard disk after the changes i i HA AS doo located a mo 6 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 239 Extra Scenarios for WinPE Adding specific drivers Our WinPE 2 1 based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support Anyway you ve got the option to add drivers for specific hardware with a handy dialog To add drivers for specific hardware please do the following 1 Once you accept the a
39. So thanks to our technology these driver repositories can be made available during the restore procedure to let Windows Vista 7 or 2008 Server automatically find and install any lacking driver with no action from your side required what is very convenient Anyway not all drivers can be found in the built in driver repositories especially when you ve got to do with specific SCSI or Serial ATA controllers For situations of this kind you ve got the option to inject any 3 party driver either by providing a path to your own driver repository collection of all drivers to your hardware devices located in one folder for the program automatically pick and install only those drivers required for your OS recommended or manually specifying drivers critical for the guaranteed startup of your system on the new hardware Adaptive Restore Application Let s consider a number of situations when the Adaptive Restore feature can help you out e If you need to upgrade to newer hardware while keeping all your programs and settings intact e If you need to replace failed hardware and cannot find an exact match for your original system specifications Known Issues 1 After transferring Microsoft Vista and later versions to different hardware you will need to re activate license of the system It s normal behavior as these systems keep tracking any change of hardware Re activation is legally justified in this case as you transfer your system to another PC
40. Startup There are several ways to start the One Button Copy Wizard Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt One Button Copy Wizard e On the Common Tasks Bar click the One Button Copy Wizard item of the Wizards menu Setup If your system meets the mentioned above requirements the wizard will automatically accomplish the copy operation after a ten second pause CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 86 Aa One Button Copy Wizard Copying the hard disk This wizard wil copy hard disk Oto hand disk 3 Orignal hard dsk Basic Had Dizk 0 VMware VMwore Virtual S SCS isk Dev l g Local Disk C Hard disk Copy Basic Hard ask 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5 51 Disk Lev g Local Disk 7 2i Fi fa A e O Ed Copy options Copy all sectors one lo one Peon incremental copy Resize options Ramove free blocks between paribons Copy data and resize parbhons proporbonaly Operation wil start inc 2 sec Cancel There are a number of options you can modify e HDD raw copy to copy the hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation e Partition raw copy to copy the on disk partitions in the s
41. and functionality CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 73 Disk View Scheduled Tasks Archives Help Archive of Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vir ae sre a 3051 Disk Dev 7 d dy 6 CO DVD Drive D 3 Hero Disks 1068 E 1 Vihware VMware Virtual SCS Des Size 222 6 MB PF i Primary NTFS 0 gt Cac ewa mea ES Recycle Bin we 92 2009 2 71 01 AM 3 E cew My hdd2 sie oo Compressed ac new PBF a anc maw pim r dy e new_0100p 000 ge are new _01100p pin 3 die ar new 01019 000 Re 1 are_pew_0101p ph arc_new_0102p 000 This atend Pelna yo lo teal exilio archi The wzard mil check f arc puen_0102p pim the archive is valid and makes you sure the archive integrity is ng arc_new_010 000 viise are new _0103p pim Diflerential Backup H ES archive_db Use thes command to create a difersnial image of the selected archive Go Boat E gt 4 Document sand Settings Ih Una this posan lo ceda an creci Me ia uE Pet Logs ES Program Files Synthetic Backup F oS This wizard allows you to perform a range of operabona on the selected H ET Program Data archive lo create a new backup entity that is to synthesize new backup pl E Recovery archives without doing backup physical ED System Volume kioman 2 m al Ci b em 8 F Show al Ei Type Creation Date Source Obesct z Sisa Flags Co Mounted y 12 2003 2 33
42. as interfering hardware settings or serious problems on the hardware level In this case only basic files and drivers such as hard disk drivers a monitor driver and a keyboard driver will be loaded Startup To start working with the Linux DOS recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch a boot mode you need Normal Safe Low Graphics Safe in the Boot menu A N By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will help you make the right choice 4 Consult the help system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject Boot menu The Boot menu contains the following commands E Normal Mode Main recovery 2 Safe Mode environment 4 Low Graphics Safe Mode Floppy disk Hard disk B MBR Find OSes on your hard disks e Normal Mode Boot into the Linux normal mode This mode uses the full set of drivers recommended e Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS mode This mode can be used as an alternative of the Linux normal mode if it fails to work properly e Low Graphics
43. bulk of software today is written for a 32 bit processor It can meet the requirements of almost any end user However that is not the case when dealing with servers processing large amounts of data with complex calculations of very large numbers That is where 64 bit architecture comes into play It can boast improved scalability for business applications that enables to support more customer databases and more simultaneous users on each server Besides a 64 bit kernel can access more system resources such as memory allocation per user A 64 bit processor can handle over 4 billion times more memory addresses than a 32 bit processor With these resources even a very large database can be cached in memory Although many business applications run without problems on 32 bit systems others have grown so complex that they use up the 4 GB memory limitation of a 32 bit address space With this large amount of data fewer memory resources are available to meet memory needs On a 64 bit server most queries are able to perform in the buffers available to the database Some 32 bit applications make the transition to the 64 bit environment seamlessly others do not For instance system level utilities and programs that provide direct hardware access are likely to fail Our program offers a full fledged support of the 64 bit architecture providing fault tolerant work for such system dependent modules as Hot Processing Copy Operations Hard drive duplication n
44. does not work properly Check whether it is so or not by scheduling a simple task call Notepad through scheduling You don t have permission to write to the selected backup destination Glossary Active Partition is a partition from which an x86 based computer starts up The active partition must be a primary partition on a basic disk If you use Windows exclusively the active partition can be the same as the system volume In the DOS partitioning scheme only primary partitions can be active due to limitations of the standard bootstrap The term backup originates from the time when the best way to protect valuable information was to store it in form of archives on external media It s become now a general notion to mean making duplications of data for protection purposes CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 244 Bootable Archive is created by adding a special bootable section when backing up the data to CD DVDs Thus you will be able to restore the data from these archives without having to run the program but by simply booting from these CD DVDs Cluster is the smallest amount of disk space that can be allocated to hold a file All file systems used by Windows organize hard disks based on clusters which consist of one or more contiguous sectors The smaller the cluster size the more efficiently a disk stores information If no cluster size is specified during formatting Windows picks defaults based on t
45. e Destination disk Select a hard disk with enough unallocated space to perform the operation CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 38 The wizard will create a copy of Local Disk F from Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev The copy wil be omated on Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev Please select where to create a copy Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev The program enables to copy a partition to a block of free space which is smaller than the YN partition itself taking into account only actual amount of data e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options Your hard disk after changes Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dew Lo E gj Unallocated WSE ed Le Where lo place a copy Please specify the size of the new partition 3624 2 39 MB 20 473 MB Please specify sire of free space before the partition 0 OMB 20 434 MB Please specty size of free space ater ihe partition 16845 O MB 20 426 MB Partition size Define the size in Mb of the copied partition Free space before Define the position in Mb of the copied partition relative to the beginning of the available range of disk space Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the available range of disk space 0 Partition size and position may also be defined by
46. e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Copy Hard Disk e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Copy Hard Disk item of the Wizards menu e Inthe Toolbar click the Copy Hard Disk button Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy hard disk operation e The hard disk to copy Select a hard disk you want to copy CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 84 On this page you can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk wall be copied bo the destination you will choose on the next page Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Local Disk C 4999 GB NTFS LI A i Be 34GB FATA e The target hard disk Select a hard disk if several where all data of the source disk will be copied to 29 Basic Hard Disk l eS VMware Virtual 5 509 D GB N TES MS F i Select a target hard disk Al data from the source hard disk wil be copied there During copy operation target Basic Hard Disk meo Ez Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev E ic re Basic Hard Disk 0 WiMware VMware Virtual 5051 Disk Dev e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options HOD raw copy Partitions raw copy Perform incremental copy Change masks for files to exciude from copy Copy data and resize partitions proportionally Mark the checkbox to copy the hard disk in the sect information structure 2 9 aloca ace crunee
47. enabled The program enables to set parameters for an executable file directly from the line However if the file path contains word gaps it is necessary to enclose it in quotes in order to make the program distinguish between the path and the used parameters By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Hot Processing Options CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 59 E Mail Options G Edit settings Eel General options Tanti e PA E mail options a ome Pa hac q y AAA LA Partftioning optiona Copy and backup options specify your e mail account options CE D 1 recordna CRIT Oigo 3 mad sanye M TP mj an di A e E Liar eia Bg rea i s dl e y SA Se A as E r ee hiy OUuiQGng server raguiras authantication Operation dependency options tual mode opborns Pile system conversi n options Copy Backup exclude options Hla Backup exclude options m 7 m 7 Fla Backup include options n fies potera Specily e mail notification options ET H ue Le a p 4 5 ae Y po Ope Send E Mail notification on apply OK Cancel This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during the Send log files and Send e mail notification operations e Outgoing mail server SMTP To send messages by using the built in mail client it is necessary to have access to a computer running an SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server All outgoing messages are first
48. folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name wil be used as a subdolder where backup data files wil be stored Archeve kecat Gare 030909111312354 ra e e Name Sze Date B H My Computer w E Local Disk C m E Local Disk E dll 5 Edit the archive name if necessary Please speciy the archive name Archive name wil be used as a subfolder where backup data fes wil Archive name we 030909071001085 Estmated archive size 4 4GB Spent avalsble on backup destination 38 GB Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 163 Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space A N available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 6 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a hor commet to describe the archrve Xi Na Mo comment 7 Seta timetable for the operation Please speciy how and when would you like to perom the task Shutdown sysiem after backup J Generate unique names for scheduled backups Run the task on 09 02 2009 at 12004M Every 1 A weekla on Monday Friday Tuesday saturday Wednesday Sunday Thursday Do mot nun the task ate A N To know more on the subject please consult the Task Scheduling chapter 8 On the Cyclic backup type page choose the way of creating a cyclic backup There are several types of the c
49. from 00 to FF You can also choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check Wipe parameters Mask 00 A Pass count 1 Mask 00 gt Pass count Mask 00 gt Pass count Mask gt Pass count Pass count forthe group of patterns Weny wipe results e Revise your changes This page informs on all the actions to be made in the wizard in a bright graphical form Your hard dsk before the changes Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk koe 6 Local Disk C 428 GE NTFS Wizard Result After the operation is completed you can see a well informative summary page providing structurally divided in depth information on all the actions made in the wizard Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 121 Fleport Disk Viewer Hard Disk Info x Hard Disk Bese GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Vitwal SCS Disk Dev Capacity 570GB 115 General Info Object Local Disk 7 Free Space Only Mo Start Time 1210 2009 2 48 18 AM End Time 12302009 248 51 AM Algorithm Info Name Pierna ima mataa Jae Pring The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog To make sure that all on disk data is irreversibly destroyed call the Disk Viewer dialog by clicking the appropriate tab and see it for yourself R
50. is in use or locked in other words Please agree to reboot your machine to make the program accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 242 2 Irun an operation and restart the machine as required but it just boots back into Windows without accomplishing the operation Please run chkdsk f for the partition in question 3 cannot create a new partition on the disk There can be a number of reasons for that e The program cannot create a new partition on a dynamic disk but only on a hard disk that uses the DOS partitioning scheme e According to the rules of the DOS partitioning scheme the following combinations of partitions cannot be created Two Extended Partitions on one hard disk Five or more Primary partitions on one hard disk If there is an Extended Partition on the disk only three Primary partitions are allowed e The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space It cannot convert a free space on an existing partition to a new partition 4 cannot copy a partition There can be a number of reasons for that The source or target disk you select is a dynamic disk 4 primary partitions or three primary partitions and an extended one already exist on the target disk 5 need to copy a partition But when selecting a place where to make a copy always get a crossed circle sign no matter whi
51. move partition areas thal don cortan any data The allows you to keep the partition s content ster move exactly as E was but vill require more time 4 Now you ve got a block of free space to add to the system partition You cannot do it directly however but by carrying out a number of extra move resize operations Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual SCS Disk Dev 5 Since the block of free space is within the extended partition you need to take it out first The program enables to resize the extended partition only when there s a block of free space adjoining its borders In our case it s CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 215 between two logical disks So we need to move it To do that please select the first logical partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Move Hesce Partition ad Nane Convert File System El Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VN Change Volume Label Y eae Chet me A Remove Drive Letter eer Make Partition Primary eii Change Cluster Size Ge TEMP G Change Serial Number ae E Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware WR Change Partition ID E local Disk e E Bass GPT Hard Disk 2 VWweal q GB local Dix 7 Wipe Partition EP Unatocated Clear Free Space Downgrade NTFS version j Test Surface ME Check File System Integrity Edit Vie
52. number 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Change Serial Number of a Partition FAT16 FAT32 and NTFS file systems include the Serial Number parameter A partition s serial number is saved in the boot sector Its value is generated while formatting The program enables to modify the serial number parameter for FAT16 FAT32 or NTFS partitions without re formatting In order to change a serial number you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Partition Serial Number dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Modify gt Change Serial Number Onthe Explorer Bar click on the current serial number 3 Enter anew serial number for the selected partition It should contain 8 hexadecimal figures 0 9 or A F The operation cannot proceed until you enter all 8 symbols Eam Are you sure you wani to change serial number of volume F Your computer may no longer boot of wak cored Please enter new senal number in hexadecimal format ZEDS 7D16 D87C 0051 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 115 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Hard Disk Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry hard disk operations supported by the program Update MBR Convert to Basic Change Primar
53. of the product Key Features Let us list some of the key features CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 11 User Friendly Fault Minimizing Interface e Graphical representation of the data to gain a better understanding A handy Launcher to easily find and run the required tasks e Comprehensive wizards to simplify even the most complex operations e Resize partitions directly on the Disk Map with the drag and drop technique e A context sensitive hint system for all functions of the program e Previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual operations Backup Facilities e Archive Database to help the user easily manage backup images get properties add delete mount etc A N This feature is only available for the Windows installation of the program l e Support of all present day techniques to store backup images Backup to local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Backup to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and system independence Backup to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in th
54. partition deletion Mark the checkbox to activate an additional security mechanism Thus when going to delete a partition you will be automatically requested to enter its label e Request confirmation when converting FAT16 to FAT32 Mark the checkbox to automatically request confirmation before converting FAT16 to FAT32 There are a number of situations when this kind of conversion is the only way out to accomplish the operation For instance you are going to migrate your system to a larger hard disk with the proportional resize of existing partitions what is very convenient As a result you can get original FAT16 partitions go beyond the 4GB limit Thus without conversion to FAT32 this operation will in no way be possible to accomplish The same goes for any copy hard disk partition or restore hard disk partition operation involving an extra upsizing Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 54 General Copy and Backup Options Edit settings ere DOGOS General copy and backup options Hdd raw pocessng coring Options Lopi Backup an entie hard disk sector by sector without taking into account mo Crome Options partibon siructire i ay ds pri Em Mi CM DE On CST ee Seth ae e A TA H ie Sl ts da F T E a ee at Tarir rie system conversion options Copy Backup exciucde options Fla Backus exclude options I mom P IA y pm PA oy A Eat me 5 hors Pao Fa Gee Cop
55. selected partition will be lost e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set the following partition parameters Your hard ek after the char qu Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virual S SCS Disk Dev Partition type From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option at the foot of the page When it is marked the next page enables to define Usos 05 bui in formal mutne a a pea Sect DO CUNA il Cob fA e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox to restrict the available values according to the used OS e Whether the surface test will be performed Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata e The amount of sectors per boot This parameter is available exclusively for FAT1
56. start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected partition archive containing information specified in the wizard It is placed into the same destination as the base image A N This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Creating an increment to a full file backup To update a file backup please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Incremental File Backup item of the Wizards menu 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe Browse for Archive page specify the required full base file archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 160 E Eb Type Creation Date Source Object Sire Flags Com Mounted 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Pledevel Archive F F 9 2 2009 5 06 03 AM Fiedevel Archive 4 KB J M Switch to Fle Waw Archive H Detala Backup date 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Total sire 113 1 KB 115 869 Bytes Archive size 1012 KB 103 723 Byles Fia Cufarc_images FLDOOO00000000000000 archive pli To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description A N To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File Vi
57. started in your WindowsXP Windows2003 Vista Please start this service right click on My Computer gt Manage gt Services gt find Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service and make it active Set also to start it automatically 10 When running a backup operation with the Paragon Hot Processing mode enabled get an error error code 0x1200 e Internal error during Hot Backup Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool You can find a name of the tool you need here http kb paragon software com 11 When running a backup operation with the Microsoft VSS mode enabled get the following error error code 0x12016 VSS can t read volume data Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool You can find a name of the tool you need here http kb paragon software com 12 When trying to back up to a network share get the following error i o error or can t open create file Please check whether you ve got a permission to write to the selected destination or not 13 When trying to restore a backup archive get the following error Can t restore to current selection or Archive does not fit Most likely you re trying to restore a backup of the whole hard disk to a partition or vice versa 14 set up a timetable for a task but it fails to execute There can be a number of reasons for that Windows Task Scheduler
58. system memory Paragon Hot Processing technology offers copy backup of locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements It is not recommended to use Paragon Hot Processing with active SQL Server Exchange or Oracle databases since the backup image contents may be corrupted Volume Shadow Copy Service Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS is designed to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 33 Initiated by a VSS aware copy backup utility VSS creates snapshots for the selected volumes and represents them as virtual read only devices called volume shadow copies Once the shadow copies are created the copy backup utility starts processing the data while applications keep writing to original volumes Unlike Paragon Hot Processing the VSS technology provides a unique possibility to make a synchronous snapshot of multiple volumes This very feature can be particularly beneficial when backing up active SQL Server 2003 Exchange 2003 or Oracle database
59. the Launcher It enables to run wizards and dialogs to specify program settings to visualize the operating environment and the hard disk configuration The Launcher s window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose and functionality CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 37 re ea deerme ia ere Laer a pel Disk ay Apr E La lia r l jite irm 4 dis Tools Choas Wizards Hard Disk i Local Disk E El Bos Hard Disk 3 ernest Hyper hans Vitual image 5 Local Disk 7 Ala a Viteors Vituel S SCS Disk Dew New Volume F 341 268 NTFS Local Disk E m 260 3 GE NTFS y E rs Ml Fami MM Far Y D Uren Ext 7 8 Main Menu Tool Bar Virtual Operations Bar Common Tasks Bar Explorer Bar Disk Map Partition List Properties Bar Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 9 Legend Bar 10 Status Bar A number of panels offer similar functionality with a synchronized layout The program enables to conceal some of them to simplify the interface management All panels are separated by vertical and horizontal expandable sliders allowing the user to customize the screen layout Main Menu The Main Menu provides access to the entire functionality of the program The available functions are as listed below A Restore the sy
60. the Main Menu Tools gt Generate Script Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Generate button to confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 3 Generate script S Al vrival operations you have made vall be witen to the script No operations Please epecdy a mame for the task script file scr OA0505_ 125173443 pal JU Addio Task List z Mone options Generale No e Script file name and location By default the program offers to add the script to the Task List with a name containing its creation date and time Unmark the Add to Task List checkbox to define an exact location and a filename for the script file The default file extension that is reserved for scripting files is psl which however can be modified In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page so you will be able to define Please select script generation options Above to riena wih the user Tum the option off f you do nal wand lo gel confirmation dalogs when the so pl la beng camed out J Commi after each operation Tum this option on to ensure the changes wil be committed after each operation Check for errors afer each operation Tum the optio
61. the entire disk Restore the logical disk from an image link on the Explorer Bar page At first the wizard displays the Welcome page simply click the Next button at the foot of the dialog window The next page refers to Browse for Archive By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any SH Restore Wizard Browse for Archive Please select an archive do restore Fj Show all z amp bb Ee Type Creation Date 7 Source Objeci 220089 22101 AM Bee Hard Disk 1 haare Vuze Wirus 5 505 Name Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Model Comment My hdd Type intemal Hard Disk Drive Total sue 10GB Fie C arc_new arc_new PBF qm a e o e Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 70 To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description including e Information on a type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based e Whether the archive is compressed or not e Whether the archive is password protected or not e The date when the archive was created In addition there are some special graphical flags to indicate crucial properties FLAG FUNCTIONALITY Disk archive E Partition archive E File archive E MBR archive De System archive E Encrypted archive Compressed archive Es Complex archi
62. the selected disk or the selected partition will be copied in the sector to sector mode including unused sectors as well e Whether the OS auxiliary files pagefile sys hyberfil sys will be included in the backup image e Whether backup images stored in the Archive Database will be processed during the backup operation Skipping backups of the Archive Database may considerably decrease the resulted image JN file and time to carry out the operation e Recording speed when the user wants to burn the backup image onto CD DVDs e ISO image folder where the archive that is to be recorded on a disc is placed e Whether the operation will be performed without rebooting the system The program needs to reboot the system in order to have exclusive access to processing data In a Windows environment this is difficult to achieve because even when all the other applications are closed the system service programs are still running However there is a way to avoid rebooting The mode of processing the backup operation without rebooting is named Hot Processing You can also define specific parameters for the Hot Processing mode e The data to be automatically excluded from the resulted backup By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog Result After the backup operation is completed you receive an image of the selected disk or the selected partition This image is placed into the specified destination
63. the specified destination a local or a network disk its features defined by the wizard Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials To merge a full partition backup with one of its differentials thus getting a new full partition archive please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Synthetic Backup item of the Wizards menu 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe Browse for Archive page you only need to specify the required differential archive The program then will automatically find its base image e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show al el E Ed bie Type Creation Date Source bjact Size E 92 2009 22101 AM Basie Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SES Disk Dev E 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev z J 9 2 2008 5 06 03 AM Fledevel Archive A 92 2009 5 11 41 AM Fieve Archive 11 rs ert Pa switch to File View Hama Local Disk 5 Mo comment Volume label Na label File system NTFS Total size 24GB Used space 363 MB Free space 23GB File larc_ images d _030909105713295 deT_030909105713295 PBF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description A N To know more on the subject please
64. to get the choice to launch the Linux or PTS DOS recovery environment every time you start up the computer With its help you will be able to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes This feature is only available for the Windows installation of the program Restore Facilities e Restore an entire disk separate partitions or only files you need from the previously created backup image e Restore with Shrink to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size taking into account only the amount of actual data of the image e Adaptive Restore to successfully migrate a Win2K physical system to a different hardware platform P2P by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for a migration of this kind Copy Facilities e One Button Copy Wizard to carry out such a technically complicated operation as cloning of hard disks just by pressing one button e Partition hard disk copy to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capability CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 13 Copy functionality can also be used as an alternative way of data protection Boot Management Facilities Boot Manager Setup Wizard to easily manage several operating systems on one computer P
65. to uninstall it first 2 Starting Setup The Welcome page informs that the application is being installed Click the Next button to continue 3 Confirm License Agreement The License Agreement page displays the Paragon License Agreement Read the agreement and then select the appropriate option to accept If you do not agree with any conditions stated there the installation process will be interrupted By clicking the Print button the License Agreement may also be printed out 4 Provide Registration Information On the Registration page you are to provide your product key and serial number 5 Provide Customer Information On the Customer Information page you are to provide the standard information i e a user name and an organization Besides you need to decide whether to make the program available for all users of this computer if several or only for the current one 6 Select an Installation Folder The Destination Folder page allows you to choose a folder where the program will be installed By default the installation folder will be created as C Program Files Paragon Software Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 To select another folder click the Change button After you have selected the required folder click the Next button to continue Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 20 Do not install the program on network drives Do not use Terminal Server sessions to install and run the program
66. user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 65 e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not File Backup Include Options corre oppe sa Include into file backup archive Backup image options Parifioning options Copy and backup options Specfy masks for files and folders that must be added to archives CD DVD recording options Hot processing options Readable files 13 fiters Run during backup options Emal opbons Operation dependency options Virtual mode Sobers Pile sytem convenion options Copy Backup exclude options File Backup exclude options ie Backup molude options Log fies options Vips options Calera fiber Calera fier aleta Par Deleta filter Calera har lesa fhar Calera har poe islets fhar wka Delete fiber mag Delete ther In this section you can find a lot of ready made include filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup images Please note by selecting certain fi
67. using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing partition To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally JN complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Boot Management Our program enables to easily manage several operating systems on one computer with the help of the Boot Manager Setup Wizard Among the key features of the wizard the following should be mentioned e Up to 16 operating systems on one PC e Secure adding removing of the Boot Manager startup record to from the MBR e Auto Boot option to automatically start up the previously chosen OS after a certain time period Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 89 e Hiding of any primary partition except selected at the moment Startup Express Launcher e Click the Boot Management button and then select Boot Manager Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Tools gt Setup Boot Manager e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Boot Manager Wizard item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Hiding other primary partitions By marking this checkbox the program will automatically assign the hidden flag to all primary partitions of the hard disk s except the one selected to boot This will help to avoid any problems when dea
68. while FAT uses a fixed local date and time The program takes proper account of these differences and enables to adjust timestamp values An incorrectly chosen time zone might lead to inability to launch certain software e Language for file names to use during the convert operation NTFS stores file names in Unicode while FAT FAT32 uses ANSI to save short file names also called the DOS aliases The codepage information is required for the correct conversion of non English file names from Unicode to ANSI and vice versa 0 An incorrectly chosen codepage will certainly result in corruption of non English file ZN names e Request confirmation of settings before NTFS lt gt FAT FAT32 conversion Mark the checkbox to automatically display the local settings dialog to check and modify if necessary the default parameters before launching the convert file system operation CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 63 Copy Backup Exclude Options AO m qhi yy pce Bs i E ae ih at A EL ELLIS General options Backup image options Partitioning options Copy and backup options Specfy masks for fies and folders that must be excluded from copy backup ope CD DVD recording options Hol procesmng options Executable amp Installations 2 iter Pun during backup options Emal opbona Operation dependency options Virtual mode options File system convenon options Ce ch Ba kL exciude Spurs pcx D
69. will set the most appropriate speed for every CD DVD Bootable ISO image That s the image to be placed together with the backup data By default the program offers its own bootable ISO image which contains a Linux DOS recovery environment However the user is free to use any bootable ISO image CD DVD boot capability The program enables to choose whether any recorded CD DVD will be bootable or only the first one for a session or without that function at all Folder where the ISO image is to be placed When the user decides not to physically burn a CD DVD but create an ISO image file this very folder will be used to contain these images CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 56 Hot Processing Options TQ Edit settings 0 a ere ODS on 74 Hot processing options Backup image opio Partitioning options Copy and backup options Y Enabla hot procasamo a am am r cb UYO BCO OO Het proceseng technology Run during backup options Emal opbons Paragon Hot Processing technology provides fast backup copy of locked Operation dependency options peritions and hard disks under any Viindews NT family OS Windows Virtual mode cottons NT 2000 4P 2003 E does not require considerable hardware resources Pile system conversion options Copy Backup exclude optiona Additional options mie Backup excuce options Aways use hot processing Fie Backup include options Los fies options Use hot processing on
70. 00 AM Local Disk 435 3 GB Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vetual 5 SCSI Diak Dev 1 Explorer Bar that displays properties of the selected image 2 Volume Explorer that enables to access the selected image as a regular folder to explorer its contents or to retrieve certain files 3 Archive List that displays a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Besides the program provides all the necessary functionality to manage backup images in the database add delete mount refresh etc All panels offer a synchronized layout and are separated by vertical and horizontal expandable sliders allowing the user to customize the screen layout Data Backup and Rescue In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to establish a reliable data protection system Creating Backup Images We have already mentioned that the most prevalent way to protect valuable data is to create backup copies backup images in terms of the program of it Depending on a type of information you need to protect and the way this information should be processed the program offers a number of handy backup wizards and dialogs Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 74 Wizard Work Algorithm To make your job with the program as easy and convenient as possible all backup wizards share similar work algorithm So let us just take as an example the Sector Backup Wizard to describe it in de
71. 00 GB 100 00 GE 100 of target disk dak anana Min Copy Size 6275 MB I Max Copy Size 500 GB Select the range of the disk space that val be occupied on the destination disk with copied partitions 9 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Apply pending changes 7 Dio not show this message again 10 When copying is completed shut down the computer 11 Disconnect physically the source hard disk 12 Boot the computer from the destination hard disk F ee complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS Let s assume you had to migrate to a new hardware platform You just connected your system hard disk to the brand new PC and tried to start up the operating system you do know for sure now that this operation had been doomed to failure from the very beginning With our program you can easily tackle this naughty problem But before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e You ve got drivers for the new hardware ready to use not zipped or in exe files e Your OS is unrolled on the new computer not in a backup image To recover bootability after migrating your physical system to different hardware please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE media 2 Once it has been loaded read the agreement and then mark the appropriate checkb
72. 146 et a e A All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the IN operation 6 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 194 Your hard disk after the changes Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev ME o Local Disk E me 34GB FATA Please specify the size of the restored partition 2470 36 MB 2470 MB Please specify size of free space before the partion 0 0 MB 2434MB Please specify size of free space after the patton 0 OMB 2434MB 7 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 8 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree A System restart is required to complete the operation What would you like to do The operation Restore partition or disk needs exclusive access to the volume C and cannot be completed without system restart After restart the operation wil Please confirm restart of your computer The operaiion wil be contrujed after E Retry na ecclusrve access lo the volume Hi AAA 00 gt ai es pieve raion complebon 9 Inthe Progress window you can see
73. 2 MB Space avaiable on backup destination 38 GB The program automatically calculates size of the future archive and informs the user about JN space available on the selected destination e Archive Comment You can add some additional description to the archive that will later help to distinguish it from the others Pease enter a hor comment to describe the archrre Na Mo comment In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option on the second page of the wizard When it is marked the next page enables to define e Whether the archive integrity will be controlled program are 100 percent flawless Nevertheless if you decided not to control the archive integrity the backup operation would take about 3 5 less time Checking archive integrity enables to guarantee that all backup images created with the e Whether image file names will be set automatically in complex archives e Compression level for the backup image including the No compression variant e Whether the archive will be split if yes you can set the maximum size for the archive files Splitting images enables to tackle issues caused by a file size limitation of some file systems e Whether the archive will be protected by password CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 76 e Whether
74. 4BA 1583BA15 7508 hio labai Partition ID 0x07 NTFS l A Erir ES ia LL A Are you sure you want to hide the partition You are about to hide partion E No label NTFS Hiding the parton may cause drive letters io be changed AN Hiding of the system partition will make OS non bootable what is quite normal ar 9 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar Type Primary NTFS version 101 10 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree After all the operations are completed you will not be able to restart the system what is quite normal Nevertheless if you do try it the following error will occur oP c00002la Fatal System Error system process terminated unexpectedly with a sta Ws oO system has been shut down All the mentioned above operations can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment 11 Install Windows XP on the newly created partition We won t go into details as for its installation as you can find all the necessary information in documentation that comes with the product However to avoid any problems we consider it necessary to draw your attention on the following issues You need a bootable distr
75. 6 and FAT32 file systems Set the number of sectors to be reserved for the boot area on the partition with this spinner control Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 97 e The amount of root entries This parameter is available exclusively for FAT16 file system Set the maximum amount of files directories to be placed in the Root Directory on the FAT16 partition e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control AN Number of available options depends on the selected file system type 2 y Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Format button to confirm the operation Eam Are you sure you want to format volume F You are about to format volume F No label NTFS Your computer may no longer boot or work comecty Plaase select new file system FATE Pease enter new volume label Mew Volume Mone opbons Format Mo e File system From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account e Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification In addition there is the possibility to make further
76. 8 KB Files directories deleted from the Clipboard remain intact on source disks e Destination to store the object s The File Transfer Wizard allows copying data to local or network drives to physical partitions without drive letters assigned or burning them to CD DVDs Choose the way the data will be stored CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 130 There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Plese select how would you like lo save the data Save data to local networ dives Ovenyria masti files Save data to physical partitions Bum the dats to CD or DVD e Revision of changes The Transfer Summary page provides structurally divided information on all the actions made in the wizard Check the changes and come back to any step of the wizard if necessary by following the required hyperlink Please overview the transfer options You can retum to the comespending page and change the options by clicking on tithe hyperlinis Obiecis to transfer Object 3 selected 1 Total data size 132 8 KB 136 024 Bytes Transfer destination Destination path Cy Space available on destination 450 6 GE 526 827 034 752 Bytes Overerite existing files No Result After the operation is completed the required data will be placed into the specified destination Available operation scenarios e Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk e Burning of data from the corrupted system
77. Based Backup File Based Backup Merits It does not dependent on a particular file system Functioning on a file folder level it is ideal for Thus it can successfully process system or archiving separate files or folders encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain It can create an exact image of a partition It enables to automatically build up contents of including its service data Thus it is ideal for a the future backup image by using an advanced backup restore of a system partition or a fast system of filters deployment to a bunch of identical computers It allows archiving data of the same volume with different backup policies It is easy and efficient when creating backup chains Demerits Resulted backup images may contain a lot of It depends on a file system structure so you redundant data won t be able to process unknown file systems It is ineffective when trying to maintain a backup It cannot be used to back up a system partition chain especially when little amount of data is being changed It is much slower when processing large amount of data Backup Types At the present moment the market is offering various types of backup imaging to meet the needs of any user Besides supporting them all our program offers a unique backup type called File Increment to a Sector Backup Full and Differential Sector Backups A full sector based backup image includes all content
78. Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately or generate a script On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environments Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image to a network share please do the following Launcher Click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button On the What to back up page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 145 Gick the check box neat to any hard disk deve or partition you want to back up Name Type A OI My Computer My Computer gt F Base Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev internal Hard Disk Dis E El E Fist Hard Disk Track First Track EU Ge Master Boot Record MBR vl T Loca Dis Primary 1 3 F El Base Hard Desk 1 VMware VMware Vitual SSCS Disk Dev intemal Hard Disk Dris E El 2 First Hard Disk Track First Track Ge Master Boot Record MBR F Local Disk E Primary F Loca Disk 7 Primary CS L
79. DOS partitioning scheme the following combinations of partitions cannot be created Two Extended Partitions on one hard disk Five or more Primary partitions on one hard disk f there is an Extended Partition on the disk only three Primary partitions are allowed 4 The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space It cannot convert a free space on an existing partition to a new partition Express Create Partition Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Express Create Partition Wizard Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Express Create Partition e On the Common Tasks bar click the Express Create item of the Wizards menu Create Partition Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Create Partition Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Partitioning button and then select Create Partition Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 91 e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Create Partition e On the Common Tasks bar click the Create Partition item of the Wizards menu Dialog Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a block of free space on the Disk Map 2 Call the Create Partition Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Create Partition e Call the popup menu for the block of free space right clic
80. Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Your computer may na Slot No Fle System Volume label No label No label NEW VOLUME Ho label he m S No laba 24GB File system NTFS 36 3MB8 Free space 23GB 7261380 End sector 12321854 In the opened dialog you can see the current enumeration of the primary partitions of the selected hard disk in the Partition Table To help you distinguish partitions from one another the program provides the following parameters for every partition Slot Volume Partition type File system Partition size Volume label There are two buttons on the right to move the selected partition up and down within the primary part of the Partition Table The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Wipe Tasks In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to wipe a hard disk partition of any file system or only destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data thus providing high level of security The operation can be accomplished with the Wipe Wizard or corresponding dialogs Wizard Startup Express Launcher Click the Security and Optimization button and then select Wipe Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 119 e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Wipe Hard Disk or Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following s
81. Disk Map 2 Call the Hide Unhide Partition Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Hide Unhide Partition Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Hide Unhide Partition 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 113 It is strongly recommended not to hide the system partition Otherwise your operating system will fail to boot Set Label of a Partition The Partition Label is a small textual field up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector It is detectable by any partitioning tool and is used for notification purposes only In order to change a partition label you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Volume Label dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Modify gt Change Volume Label Onthe Explorer Bar click on the current volume label Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Change Volume Label 3 Enter a label for the selected partition Ea Are you sure you wani to change label on volume FJ Please speciy a volume label for eamer recognition o
82. E 2 1 as well The latest Linux kernel to enjoy support of a wider range of hardware configurations including the brand new Intel ICH9 chipset CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 10 e WinPE 2 1 based bootable recovery environment to enjoy support of a wider range of hardware configurations with the option to add drivers for specific hardware on the fly e More flexibility for online data processing techniques to provide for easier configuration for both Paragon Hot Processing and Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS e Better support for 64 bit platforms to reboot your computer to one of the three special modes Windows native Linux or DOS to automatically complete operations which cannot be accomplished under 64 bit Windows e Automatic data exclusion with an advanced system of filters will help you automate the process of building up contents of the future backup image by excluding irrelevant data such as movies music etc e Better support for GUID Partition Table GPT to back up and restore not only single GPT volumes but entire disks including the option of resize during the restore operation e Better support for the Apple Boot Camp Configuration with the option not only to back up and restore this kind of configurations but to copy single volumes or entire disks with resize e Better support for Linux ExtFS starting from Ext2FS up to the brand new Ext4FS e More usability when mana
83. FS partitions under all versions of Windows DOS 5 0 and later e Limited read write access to Apple HFS partitions A Unfortunately support of non Roman characters for the HFS file system is unavailable at the moment The company is about to implement it in the nearest future Supported Media e Support of both MBR and GPT hard disks up to 1 5 TB tested CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 16 e IDE SCSI and SATA hard disks e CD R CD RW DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R double layer and also Blu ray discs e FireWire i e IEEE1394 USB 1 0 USB 2 0 hard disks e PC card storage devices MBR and GPT flash memory etc Getting Started In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to get the product ready to use Distribution Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 is distributed in two ways e Boxed package from Paragon Technology GmbH and resellers e Downloadable package over the Internet at the company s web site Distributive CD The boxed package includes a distributive CD that is in fact a bootable Linux DOS recovery environment with auto run of the Windows installation thus it can be used as a ready made solution see Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media But if you re going to run the Windows components you need to install them first see Installation lf you want to download an update upgrade of the product it will be in form of the downloadable installation packa
84. File system ID is a file system identifier that is placed in the partition It is used to quickly detect partitions of supported types A number of operating systems completely rely on it to distinguish supported partitions Partition ID is saved in appropriate entries of the Partition Table and takes only 1 byte of space Partition Label or Volume Label is a small textual field up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector This value is used for notification purposes only It is detectable by any partitioning tool including the DOS FDISK utility Modern operating systems Save it within a file system e g as a special hidden file Thus it is able to contain a relatively large amount of text in multiple languages Partitioning Scheme is a set of rules constraints and format of the on disk structures to keep information on partitions located on a hard disk There are known several partitioning schemes The most popular of them is the so called DOS partitioning scheme It was introduced by IBM and Microsoft to use multiple partitions in the disk subsystems on IBM PC compatible computers Another popular partitioning scheme is the so called Logical Disks Model LDM that originates from the UNIX mainframe systems Veritas Executive accommodates a simplified version of LDM to the Windows 2000 operating system Windows 2000 and XP support two quite different partitioning schemes the old DOS partitioning scheme and the new
85. Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vetual S SCSI Disk Dev intemal Hard Disk Drive 5 First Hard Disk Track First Track gt Master Boot Record MER e Backup destination The wizard allows saving backup archives to local or network drives to physical partitions without drive letters assigned to FTP Severs the Backup Capsule or burning them to CD DVDs You need to select a destination taking the estimated archive size and available space on the backup destination into account There are several ways the Vizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data lo the Backup Capsule Save data to local network dives Save data lo physical partitions save dats lo FTP locations Burn the data to CD or DVD Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 75 e Name and location of the resulted image Provide a file name for the new image and its exact location The program automatically offers an easy to understand name containing the date and the time of the archive creation which can anyway be modified select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name wil be used as 3 subtoder where backup data Mes wil be stoned Archive location Gare fest E el hama Size Date O My Computer H E Local Desk 0 F Local Disk E t Archives 5 H E images 200 0 1 1649 Z A Network Archive details Archive name at tesi Estmated archive size
86. Hard Disk Manager Paragon Hard Disk Manager Simple Restore Wizard One Button Copy Wizard Wipe Wizard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector p fs Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Start the command line 5 Launch the Backup Wizard by selecting in the Main Menu of the program Wizards gt Backup Wizard Operations METAN Help Copy Hard Disk One Burton Copy Wizard Backun Wizard Restore Wizard d GPT Disk 0 V GPT Disk 0 v pple HES leo pa isk 1 2A isk QA 279 GPT Disko Disk O Simp Undelete Paritions File Transter Wizard Boot Corrector You can create delete and format hard disk partions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the aan please select the drive and one of its partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of ihe partitioning operations NTFS Mo label rive Size 112 Gb Type Network Configurator ed Volume label ed GPT Disk 0 Size 112 Gb Primary FAT32 200 Mb 15 0 Mb 185 Mb EFI Primary Apple HFS 549 Gb 14 2 Gb 40 7 Gb hkopard Primary Free 128 Mb Primary NTFS 56 6 Gb 105 Gb 45 7 Gb No label 6 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 7 On the What to back up page select your Mac hard disk Retained GPT Disk O Model VMware Virtual IDE on nities Size 112Gb Retained GPT Disk 0 Se I 14 2 Gb 10 9 G
87. Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the pian please select the drive and one of its partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations Simple Restore Wizard Wipe Wizard Express Resze Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Start the command line 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page select the Search for Windows installations to correct option Ple ase choose the operation Search for Windows installations lo correct CD Correct the Master Boot Record MBR Correct the partition boot record Modify partition parameters Correct boot parameters bootini BCD To begin click Next 5 Onthe next page choose the required Windows installation from the list of found installations if several then select the Edit the Boot ini file option If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 171 Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installations on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status 5 refer lo a System partition you can edit the Boot ini file B a boot partition you can conect the System Registry N_ Part
88. In both cases the program functionality will be limited 7 Confirm Installation On the Ready to Install the Program page click the Install button to start the installation or the Back button to return to any of the previous pages and modify the installation settings 8 Copying Files The Copying Files page shows the overall progress of the installation Click the Cancel button to abort the setup 9 Finishing the Installation The Final page reports the end of the setup process Click the Finish button to complete the wizard To accomplish online backup copy of locked partitions hard disks the program uses a kernel mode hotcore driver thus the system reboot is required to complete the installation procedure First Start To start Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 under Windows please click the Windows Start button and then select Programs gt Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 gt Paragon Hard Disk Manager The program provides wide opportunities in the field of hard disk structure modification so just to be on the safe side please make a backup of your data before carrying out any operation The first component that will be displayed is called the Express Launcher Thanks to a well thought out categorization and hint system it provides quick and easy access to wizards and utilities that we consider worth using on a regular basis With its help you can also start up the traditional launcher the help system or go to the program s hom
89. J Reboot the computer 5 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 Onthe What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image double click on it to proceed Select Image i Created on rhive nan 0 2006 May 27 14 5255 am 2705061452006 71 PBF 2008 May 28 080754 BP238508 PRF Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 178 7 Onthe Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Panition preview Image of the partition BP230508 PEF A008 May 8 Wed 08 03 54 NTFS Wolurme label WinxP Size Capacity 3 0 Gb 3 216 052 274 b Used space 18Gb 60 Free space 1 2 Gb 39 Sectors Cluster 1 8 Onthe next page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Basic Disk 0 40 0 Gb 986Gb Application BackupCapsule 100Gb Ho label Freg 17 2 Gb All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 9 Onthe Partition Start and Size page you can change size of the partition and its location if necessary Parton pre
90. Mware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drie 7 E E The sire of obsects to back up 499 9 GB Estimated archive size 7 2 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 4 On the Backup Destination page select the Burn the data to CD or DVD option There pre several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like lo save the Sci Save data to the Backup Capsule Save data to local network diwes Save data to physical partiona Save daia to FTP locations Bum the data to CD or DVD 5 Select a recordable device on the list of available CD DVD devices and edit the archive name if necessary Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 144 Seleci a recorder to burn archive images to Mame Disc types LB Optiarc DVD AW AD 7I7DA CO AVRW DVD R RW DVD RAM DVD R RW 2 CO Bumer Emulator CD R RW DA DVD Bumer Emulator DVD R RW Archive details Archive nama BPO30909 No more than symbols and only in Engish Estimated archive size AA GB Please take into account the Estimated archive size value It can give you a hint about the number of CD DVD discs required for the operation 6 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Na No comment
91. N Time elapsed 00 00 26 Time w finish Overall progress Rebuilding panitions into Alloperations have been finished 7 Restart the computer System Migration Scenarios Migrating system to another hard disk Clone HDD Let s assume that you ve bought a new hard disk It s faster and of much higher capacity than your current system disk so it s quite natural you start thinking about system migration We can help you do that To migrate your system from one hard disk to another please do the following Launcher 1 Connect both source and destination disks to the computer 2 Turn on the computer 3 Click the Copy Disk item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the Select Hard Disk to Copy page select a source disk a hard disk you want to copy On this page you can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk will be copied whe et tht tat nat page Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev I q Local Disk C 2999 G8 NTFS ornate Vitware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev 6 Onthe Select Target Hard Disk page select a destination disk a hard disk to copy contents of the source disk Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 233 Select a target hard disk All data from the source hard disk will be copied there During c
92. PARAGON Technologie GmbH Systemprogrammierung ParaGOn Coa aKa Heinrich von Stephan Str 5c 79100 Freiburg Germany sfraracon Tel 49 0 761 59018201 Fax 49 0 761 59018130 Internet www paragon software com Email sales paragon software com Hard Disk Manager 2010 Server User Manual CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Contents INTOQUCHON aciendo 9 What s New in Hard Disk Manager 2010 200 A AA 9 PFOGUCE Components idad 10 Features OVEr UI Wine ecrcencdod 10 KEV RETURN cence ne ceeceuswateanaaeseeuceswapueceusecunens 10 User Friendly Fault Minimizing INterface cccccssccccssseccccessccccesecccsusececceececseusecesseeceseeneceesenceessueceseusecessugceesansesetsuneces 11 Backup FACIES acia 11 Restore Faces ria io Nadia 12 CODY FACIES sae 12 Boot Management Faciles acid EA TIA gp aan aeoanaa A dais 13 Partitions Hard Disk Management Facilities isacliereah AN uae ac aetaachueehasadau a eel anaes 13 File System Optimization FACIES aia A 13 WiperFa clero et ee PIP Pe Re ae 14 AUtomatizatiOn Facite dit ana AR Apr ANA EAN 14 Auxiliary FACIES a 14 Supported Technolo ses ista AAA NS 14 Supported FING SVSECIVS asii AA NS 15 Supported Medi is AA SNS 15 Getting State dns lla 16 DISTIDUCON anio oie 16 A A A nausea secosmeass 16 ONIS DISTA TON aro putts bconseattcesei ve O E osm va eae snitoone tetas sneer nena E 16 FR I SUN aL LOIN cise reset terrestris AN AA AA NASA e
93. S Starting the P2P Adjust OS Wizard to make your system bootable on different hardware Tools at Starting the File Transfer Wizard to transfer data from any media Besides it Ye File Transter Wizard l provides access to Paragon backups as regular folders to browse through their contents or copy required files Starting the Boot Manager Setup Wizard to easily manage several operating il Boot Manager Wizard systems on one computer Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 45 ntal new OS wizard Starting the Install New OS Wizard to install a new operating system News and Documentation Hard Disk Manager Help Launching the help system you can also do it by pressing F1 A Opening the page which contains information about the program This page will About Hard Disk Manager l l be displayed in the Explorer Bar ES Script Manual Opening a brief review on the Paragon Scripting Language Disk Map The Disk Map is displayed in the Explorer Bar when the Disk View tab is selected It is located either at the top or at the bottom of the window depending on the state of the Disk Map Location option Main Menu View gt Disk Map Location As the name infers the Disk Map displays the layout of physical and logical disks Physical disks are represented with rectangle bars that contain small sized bars These small sized bars represent logical disks Their color depends on the file s
94. SS aaa ici 139 TWPICASCONANO Serranos ini ccoo dni N E E 140 Backup SCOM ANOS isidro 140 Creatine the Backup Capsule eano aio aude 140 Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule cccoocccnconccnnnonaccnnnnnnonnnnononnnonaronnonononnnonnconnonanonnonanonononaninnnnas 141 Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD occnnncnnnnncnnccnnnnnnnanancccnnnnnnncnanononononononananananonacannnnnnncnonoss 143 Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive ooccccccnccnncnnnonnnonaconnnnanonnnonncnnnonaronnonononnnnnnronnonaronnonanonnnnnacnnnnnas 144 Backing up a hard disk or partition to an FIP Server sionista pared celica 146 Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB Cive ccccccssseccccseccccensecccsesececeeeeceeeeesecessuecesauseceesegceesseneceesegeceesenes 148 Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned Partition ccccccccccnnnnnnnnnncccncnnnnnnnnnn 151 Creating a aliterenitial toa full partition DackU Ducati data 153 Creating an increment to a full partition backup ccccooccnnconoccnnnnanonnnnanonnnonaconnnnanonnonononnnnononnnonaronnonanonnnnnncnnnonaronnonanonnos 156 Creating an incrementto aulaClic 159 Backing up With Smart Backup WIZ Oia dd ds 160 Creating cycle partition DAC KUO ssc ati calada 161 CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials
95. Selected par of Retained Batic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Dive 40 268 SB Apple HFS HFS 41250MB MB 1 72895 MB gt MB 5 On the next page of the wizard you need to confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option The Wizard has not appbed your changes pet On this page you can ether accept o A reconsider the changes Please note that F you accept the changes the Wizard val physically perform all the neccessary operabons and A vall not be possible to undo the changes It may take come bime lo apply the changes You may also be asked lo restart pour computer durmio this process Would you kke bo apply your changes Y C No let me reconsider 6 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree System restart is required to complete the operation What would you like to do and cannot be completed without system restart After restart the operation wall conhnue m boot ime mode Do not turn off the computer until the operation completes Restart the computer Please conimm restat of pow computer The operation wal be continued alter system restar EP Rey Manually close used files and retry the operabior 7 Inthe P
96. Unallocated DEE 1404 GE NTFS 100768 FATA Volume size 247 038 6MB_E w 247 038 MB 368 968 MB Free space before 121 330 84 MB Obytes 121 930 84 MB Free space after 0 Bin T ome ote PA ee Ne Select this option lo mov patton areas that don contain ary data This allows you to keep the partions content afer move exactly as was but wil require more time 9 The block of free space has been released Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Y Data FJ EE 140 4 GB NT E 10 Now you need to move the second primary partition just the way we did it with the logical partition to make the block of free space adjoin the system partition Unall 119 G5 11 Finally increase size of the system partition Call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 12 In the opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the right thus increasing its size Are you sure you wani to move resize system volume C You are about to move resize NTFS volume No label C Bane Hard Disk D VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Volume size 162 547 31 MB s e 11 620 MB 162 548 MB Free space before 0 37 MB y O bytes 150 868 20 MB Free space after 0 Bytes a O bytes 150 860139 MB Sector to sector move Select this option lo move partition segs t
97. VD Burn Partition to CD or DVD Restore the selected partition from a backup image Resize Move Resize the selected partition ystem Convert file system of the selected partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 41 gn Drive Letter Assign drive letter to the selected partition a a Change Serial Number Downgrade NTFS version Decrease version of the selected NTFS partition Change Partition ID Change identifier of the selected partition Make Partition Primary Make the selected partition Primary Se Test Surface Check File System Check the selected partition for possible file system errors ntegrity I Edit View Sectors View edit sectors of the selected partition perties Get in depth information on the properties of selected partition View Layouts Manage the Launcher layout with several predefined profiles Manage the Tool Bar representation show hide standard and navigation Toolbar buttons text labels and large icons Status Bar Display the Status Bar Common Tasks Bar Display the Common Tasks Bar Disk Map Legend Display the Disk Map legend Properties and Commands Display the Explorer Bar Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 42 Disk Map Location Select whether the Disk Map will be located on the top of the main window or at the bottom Open the Help system you can also do it by pressing F1 Open
98. Yes button to continue z z On this page you can specify a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 6 Enter a label for the future partition in the textual field It will later be used for the drive identification OS labels will be displayed in the Boot Manager s startup menu to help you boot the required operating system OS label Windows XP 7 The program will carry out all the necessary operations and then automatically restart the computer to initiate the installation process If you ve changed your mind on installing a new operating system don t insert its 4 distributive CD but press ESC when the following message appears CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 224 Insert distributive CD DVD and press any key to continue or Esc to abort the action Please make sure your BIOS is set up to boot from CD DVD All the mentioned above operations can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment 8 Install Windows XP on the newly created partition We won t go into details as for its installation as you can find all the necessary information in documentation that comes with the product However to avoid any problems we consider it necessary to draw your attention on the following issues You need a bootable distributive CD of Windows XP to install it To automatically s
99. _esplorer_expart pl LI All operations have been finished S T ono N i This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Restoring a file increment to a partition backup Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble because of a virus attack But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a local disk Besides you make file increments of your documents and e mail database to that backup on a regular basis That s just enough to easily roll everything back to the point when run smoothly Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 192 To restore your system partition with a file increment from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Restore item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 Onthe Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment archive to your system partition backup e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any RE Show al le amp fe te Type Creaton Date Source Obyeci Sira i 32005 AED 101 18 58 AM 10 36 AM Fie lewel Archive 444 KB amp 9 3 2009 3 57 21 AM Local Disk 7 24GB E 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Desk 1 VMware Vihare Virtual 5 SCSI Di
100. a Mes wi be siared Archive delads Archive name ae 030903071001085 Estimated archive size Ad GE Spent avalsble on backup destination 38 GB 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a hor comment to describe the mche E Ky Ma comment 9 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 10 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process A N This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive To back up a dual boot Mac Mac OS X and Windows XP Vista 7 and then place the resulted image to an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to the computer 3 Restart the computer It will be automatically started up into the Linux recovery environment Normal Mode since it s the only mode that provides support for Mac computers CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 149 4 Inthe Linux launch menu select
101. a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program 11 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished under Windows File Transfer Wizard To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with the File Transfer Wizard please do the following Launcher 1 Call the popup menu for the required backup image right click of the mouse button in the Archive Database and then select the menu item Restore File from Archive Thus you automatically open it with the File Transfer Wizard Fra PoR Type Creation Date Source Object Site Flags a IF 9 3 2009 7 45 37 AM Fledevel Archive 1368KB ie J E 9 3 2008 7 38 58 AM Aledevel Archive 1368KB kr ol 13 2009 7 10 36 AM Fledevel Arc rl 3 A008 YT AM Local Duk Add an Archive to the Database la 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard L Delete the Archive from the Database yop E 3 2 2003 5 20 25 AM New Volume Restore Files 4GB EA 9 2 2008 5 11 41 AM Fledevel Aro Y 3 1 KB F 92 2009 5 06 03 AM Aledevel Arc ba Incremental File Backup AKB E 9 2 2009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk Jog Ji J i ig 9 2 2009 2 21 01 AM Basic Hard L 3 l 2 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Oipboard Hame Source Path images Users use Desktop images C ar
102. aaa far Fie Backup exclude options wid Delete tier Rie Backup include options cab Pelea fiar Log Fies options msi Daaa filter mB Exclude from Copy Backup mpe opha map Delete fiter dew Daata fitar Amitiary files 12 ften old Imp Peete fier fem alaia fiar In this section the program enables to specify what data should be automatically ignored during copy and sector based backup operations You can filter certain files or folders either by the manual selection or by creating masks what is more preferable Thus you will be able to effectively manage contents of your backup images or partition hard disk copies By default there are no available filters To create a filter please click the Add Category button Fine aa pal pa a nage COLE ME CALED at aer le Filter You can use wildcards and as file name mask Vildcands w in path are not a owed In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 64 Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By mark
103. abel Basic Disk 0 Size 250 Gb D E Primary NTFS 200 Gb 1 7 Gb 199 Gb Vista 1 Primary FAT 32 49 7 Gb 2449 Mb 48 6 Gb No label 4 Unhide the partition by calling the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and then selecting Unhide Create an image of partition Burn an image of panition to CO DWD Restore panition from image AIR rine Co aiiiar ARA dd 199Gb Vista int 49 6Gb No label pe Ape Format E a Sel activa Wipe partition Clear free space Convert el label Resize Move oa Linmount Change cluster size Modify Change mot size Change boot size Retest surface 5 Only for the Windows XP Windows Vista scenario you need to make the system partition active as well by calling the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and then selecting Set Active gt MTFS No label J Create an image of partition Bum an image of partition to CO DWD T lard Drive Size 40 0 Gb Restore partition from image AHR E Copy partition AE 18Gb 1 gt Gb e 54Mb 370Gb Create AN H ne ME Wipe partition Clear free space Convert Resine Mave Set label Umouna Change cluster size 6 Youwill be notified after the operations are completed CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 232 Operations list Suboperation progress Sa parlor dans OT Operation progress AA
104. able Backup date 93 2009 7 38 58 AM Total size 136 9 KB 140 120 Bytes Archive size 1 8 KB 1 865 Bytes Fis Gare mages DIFF 126946730000000 FLEO archive p i Base archive G anc_images arc_images PBF N N To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 On the How to Restore File Complement page select whether you want to restore both the partition archive and the desired file increment or just the file increment In our case we choose the first option You have selected file complement to a volume archive This archive can be restored te volume or you can only restore the files saved in the file archive Restore ony fies Per wath the A Mote you choose to restore archive together with a volume all data on the target volume will 5 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would lite to restore the archive lo Note that F you select an existing hard disk or partition s content wil be deleted and replaced wth the one from the archive Basic Hard Dick 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Msk Dev ji Local Disk C EE 499 9GB NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS isk Dev y td Local Disk E i j E o Unraloe EEE
105. ace blocks together into one united block and moving partitions if necessary If the total amount of free space is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of space from one of the existing partitions thus resizing it Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 141 If the partition is locked and cannot be resized the wizard makes the system reboot to A N create the backup capsule and automatically boots the system again The rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows 5 Activate the bootable recovery environment if needed With its help you will get the choice to boot directly from the backup capsule for maintenance or recovery purposes every time you start up the computer Alow to start recovery system from backup capsule Time to display the backup capsule startup message 5 seconds Choose a hot key for startup from the backup capsule Fl Startup message preview Press Fl to start recovery from Backup Capsule Do not allow to start recovery system from backup capsule This operation will result in overwriting of the current MBR thus in case of having a third side boot manager it will be removed To avoid that you can save the current MBR with the help of the Edit View Sectors tool The backup capsule can only be bootable if it is located on the bootable device assigned in the BIOS 6 Start the operation by clicking the Next button or return to correct the
106. ailability requirements but it won t be accomplished until all active transactions are complete The point is to provide a coherent state of all open files and databases involved in a process taking into account that applications may still keep writing to disks As a result an online data processing cannot boast high operating speed Our program supports both offline and online methods of data processing As far as online method is concerned it offers its own hot processing algorithm together with the possibility to use snapshot technologies provided by the Microsoft VSS framework Paragon Hot Processing Technology Paragon Hot Processing is an online copy backup technology for Windows NT family operating systems Developed back in 2001 nowadays it is integrated with all copy backup solutions offered by the company Paragon Hot Processing is not exactly a snapshot technology though it has much in common with it During an online copy backup the program uses the kernel mode driver HOTCORE SYS to intercept and control disk write activity of applications and the operating system The hotcore driver as an integral part of the program is installed during the setup procedure that s why the system reboot is required to complete the setup procedure For the most part the driver is in the idle mode until it is activated with the program While in this mode it bypasses any calls having no effect on the overall system performance but a few kilobytes of the
107. al S SES Hak Dev 158 7 GB NTFS D Analyze Fragmentation Defi uy ment Partition Basic Hard Disk 1 YM q 5 i Defrag ment MFT j Local Disk E a ct MFT 258 3 GB NTFS y ompact Test Surface Basic GPT Hard Disk i E Pack Dev a NTFS E FAT G Check File System Integrity Uma Edi Properties 4 Inthe opened dialog define settings of the operation To improve the performance we recommend you to mark the Do not save content of the Pagefile sys or and Hiberfile sys checkbox as these files are only needed for the current Windows session Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 237 e Defragment volume C Defragmentabon may improve performance of your system For locked volumes however Fis operation wil require the system restar Directores placement W ere ores Sod by size Do mot sort al sor by modification ime Do not sort A A The Defragment Partition dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 5 Start the operation by clicking the Yes button Hard Disk Utilization To irreversibly destroy all on disk information without any possibility to recover and that way providing the maximum level of security please do the following Launch the Wipe Wizard There are several ways to do it Express Launcher e Click the Security and Optimization bu
108. al size value e Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map or on the Partition List then select the menu item Move Resize Partition 3 Define parameters of the operation Are you sure you wan to move resize system volume C You ant about to move resze NTFS voume Mo label C Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Volual 5 SCSI Diek Dev MB 2239 781 MB e gt 277 850 73 MB F 277 850 76 MB q ia el de e ma la eT Mis ODDO lo mowe parifion areza nal Gon contan any Cala Trea allows you bo i the patins content after move exactly aa was bul wil require more lime e Volume size Define size in Mb of the modified partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 109 Free space before Define the partition position in Mb relative to the beginning of the available range of disk space Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the available range of disk space Sector to sector move Mark the checkbox to move the partition in the sector by sector mode to process its unused space as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out
109. ally the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Yes button to confirm the operation s Are you sure you wani to create a new partition on disk 37 You are about lo create a new partition in Unallocated 19 9 GB area Please select size position and file system of the new partition Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Please specty new parblson size 20479 gt FMB 20 479 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 OMB 20 465 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition 0 OMB 20 472 MB Please select fle system for new partition NTFS A Please enter new volume label New Volume Pease apeciy dive letter H e More eto Te E e Define whether the partition will be Primary Extended or Logical You can choose the desired partition type from the pull down list As a matter of fact the available alternatives fundamentally depend on the selected block of free space within the Logical free space only Logical partitions can be created Within the Primary free space both Primary partitions or the Extended Partition can be created e Partition Size Define the size in Mb of the new partition e Free space before Define the position in Mb of the new partition relative to the beginning of the block of free space CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 94 Free space after Define the a
110. ameters for the required FTP location Selec a folder where archive should be placed and speciy archive name Archive name wil be used as 3 subfolder where backup data files will be stoned Archive location Rp master paragonsoltware com backup EN Name Paragon FTP Login upload Password TETTI i Remember password Port Zl Use Active Moda Archive location Type in a full path to the required FTP location Name Set a name for the FTP server optional Login Enter a login to access the FTP server Password Enter a password to access the FTP server Click Remember password to save it next time you back up to this location Port Specify the required port 21 by default and click Use Active Mode if necessary Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 148 When ready click the arrow button opposite the archive location field to check out you ve got access to the FTP location You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program JN work with the required port 21 by default 6 If yes you ll get a new item on the list named after the selected FTP location By clicking the icon you can browse it to specify a more exact location for your backup image Marne Sze Date ie B Fargon FTPimaster paragon sofiware com Backup 7 Edit the archive name if necessary Please spec y the archive name Archive name wil be used as a sub odder where backup dai
111. an adjacent partition On this page you can choose a partition that wil be expanded to include adjacent partition Please note that E is possible to select only FAT FAT32 or NTFS partitions You will not be able to proceed further no adiacent partons of these types are present on the disk Basic Hard Disk U VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev poo 0 data 2 282 3 GB NTFS 217GB NTFS e The partition to merge with Choose the second partition for the merge operation the contents of which will be placed in a folder on the resulted joined partition By default the program offers an easy to understand folder name to store files of the second partition which however can be customized Select an ASCO DE 10 MEJO Wen e ara Peon The par ion vel pa Mene 10 Me 04 YOU Paya 10 selected on the previous page The content of the second parttion wi be placed in a folder inside the resulting pation A 1 GB NTFS Specify a folder name to keep content of the selected partition Folder Mame manad pation content Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 101 Be particularly careful when selecting system partitions to process since the incorrect a JN order in which two partitions have been chosen will result in inability to boot the operating system Result After the operation is completed the disk space of the two adjacent partitions will be consolidated Redistributing Unused Space between Partit
112. and partitions Besides the general information such as capacity used space or file system type it provides the possibility to get info on hard disk geometry cluster size exact partition location etc There are several ways to get properties on a partition hard disk Launcher 1 Choose a partition hard disk on the Disk Map then select in the Main Menu Partition Hard Disk gt Properties 2 Call the popup menu for the selected partition hard disk right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Properties General Fae System indo Advanced Local Disk C Mo label gt NTFS Primary z 499 5 G8 536 368 914 848 Bes 1 043 571 504 Sectors 336B 1 10 016 497 664 Bytes 19 563 472 Sectors 490 6 GB 99 526 852 317 184 Bytes 1 023 005 432 Sectors In the opened dialog information will be grouped according to its properties thus by clicking tabs you can get information you need Volume Explorer Volume Explorer is a special tool to browse and export contents of the local mounted unmounted volumes formatted to FAT16 FAT32 NTFS Ext2FS Ext3FS ReiserFS file systems Besides it enables to access Paragon backups as regular folders to explorer their contents or to retrieve certain files Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 128 To launch the Volume Explorer you should click Disk View tab in the Explorer Bar and then choose Volume
113. arate files and folders from a backup The program provides a very convenient option to access backup archives and restore only data you need the so called selective restore functionality This operation can be accomplished either with the Restore Wizard File Transfer Wizard or Volume Explorer Restore Wizard To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with the Restore Wizard please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Once it has been loaded read the agreement and then mark the appropriate checkbox to accept Press Page Up and Page Down to scroll the pert you accepi the terms of ine agreement click the check bow Selon le 1 accept Hie eimi in the License Agreement Apen Recline If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use the program 3 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Select the Restore Wizard 4 Onthe Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the Browse for Archive page choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image Copyri
114. artition Hard Disk Management Facilities Basic functions for initializing partitioning and formatting hard disks create format delete Instead of the standard Windows disk tools the program supports all popular file systems Express Create Partition Wizard to create a new partition in the most appropriate place of a hard disk format it to NTFS and then make it available in the system by assigning a drive letter Merge Partitions Wizard to consolidate the disk space which originally belongs to two adjacent partitions NTFS FAT16 FAT32 into a single larger partition Redistribute Free Space Wizard to increase free space on one partition by up taking the on disk unallocated space and the unused space of other partitions Express Resize Partitions Wizard to increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition of a hard disk including partitions of Apple Boot Camp NTFS hot resize upward to enlarge an NTFS partition system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work Convert a file system FAT16 32 NTFS Ext2 Ext3 without reformatting Mount a partition assign a drive letter of any file system type to make it available for your operating system Modify file system parameters make active inactive hide unhide change serial number partition ID volume label etc Install New OS Wizard to make a system ready to install a new operating system Undelete Partitions Wizar
115. ation form Click Register The most important field in the form is an E mail address as it serves as a login to enter the system Besides your access password will be sent to this address as well To register a new product If you are a registered user and would like to register Hard Disk Manager 2010 please do the following 1 Run an Internet browser and visit the page www paragon software com my account In the Email field of the Authorization section enter an E mail used for registration In the Password field enter a password received after registration Click Sign in If the user name and password are valid you will get to your account Click Register new product of the Products section Enter your product serial number in the Serial Number field You can find it in the product box or obtain from your reseller Click Next On the next page you will be asked to provide some additional data Also you will need to decide whether you want to get confirmation on registering the product by E mail or not Click Next and then click Finish That is all The product is now registered How to Download Updates Upgrades Downloading of updates upgrades can be fulfilled in the following way 1 6 Run an Internet browser and visit the page www paragon software com my account In the Email field of the Authorization section enter an E mail used for registration In the Password field enter a password received after regi
116. b 54 9 Gb 56 6 Gb leopard Mo 8 Onthe Backup Destination page select the Save data to any local drive or a network share option Mo label Yes Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 150 Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you wantto save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare extemal drives and t a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want io save the archive lo Burn data to CD DVD Choose this option if you wan the Wizard to burn the archive to CD or DVD You will be prompted 1 choose a CD or DVD RW drive 9 Select an external USB drive as a backup destination Specify image file to create om Disk D UFSD dish hive E SRECYCLE BIN O Trashes A i RECYCLER y 3 gt System Volume Information Rename F6 Newlokder F7 File name Img_Do pb File type image file 10 Edit the archive name if necessary Backup destination Archie name 5ioragefimg_00 pb Space available on destination 34 8 Gb Approximate archive size 17 5 Gb Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 11 Add comments to your backup describ
117. be taken into account during any operation carried out with the program e Enable data loss protection Mark the checkbox to make the program work in the fail safe mode also referred to as the data loss protection mode which ensures reliability for operations by maintaining a special journal In case of a hardware malfunction power outage or an OS failure happened in the middle of a data sensitive operation resize move merge redistribute change cluster size etc the program will ask to insert the bootable recovery media and automatically complete the interrupted operation thus reviving the corrupted partition It is strongly recommended to enable this option Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 52 Backup Image Options TO Edit settings S g Backup image options a ri p I et ee 1 r r mi ymn mn m mF aa ir rrii i Copy and backup option VON arcrve iniegmy Fi ee ps i PX har bs rl coran Opiniona E a e rE a Pun E ar o pm ong I ji eee Be a AE man dd Sy DER LID pane ona Sel mage tee namas auiomabcary Emal options Overatior dependency cobans Choose this option to automatically name fies in complex archive E et a A Pa a Virtual mode opbora E mi ma TRtm CONEREN WEDOS Compression leal Copy Backup sciude options Loren aaa a Lal Sis Balas all le is PITIE DOT een Backup AA AAA Choose this option to allow writing of spec o date that wil later be u
118. ble for it or generate a script CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 143 9 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process 0 This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environments Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then burn the resulted image to CD DVD please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe What to back up page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Gick the check box next to any hard disk diva or partition you want to back up Name Type A A My Computer My Computer Ml F Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev intemal Hard Desk Ors f First Hard Disk Track First Track Master Boot Record MBR iv cal Lek Primary r 3 F E Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev intemal Hard Desk Dris E First Hard Disk Track First Track Ge Master Boot Record MBA EP Local Disk E Primary Local Dist 7 Primary Loca Disk 7 Primary E loca Disk 0 Primary F Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware V
119. c names are automatically generated by Linux in accordance with the order of hard disks in BIOS and the order of partition records in the Partition Table Thus changing enumeration of the primary partitions can lead to changing of paths to some important resources In DOS The last versions of MS DOS use a rather sophisticated algorithm for a drive letter assignment A drive letter which is assigned to a partition depends on the order of records in the Partition Table Thus changing enumeration of the primary partitions affects the drive letters assignment In early versions of MS DOS it could even lead to the unavailability of a partition The program provides the ability to change enumeration of the primary partitions This feature will allow you to fix problems concerning an inappropriate order of partitions In order to modify enumeration of the primary partitions you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Primary Slot dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Hard Disk gt Change Primary Slot Call the popup menu for the selected hard disk right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Change Primary Slot Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 4 E Are you sure you wami to change primary slots order You are about to change pamary slois order on Basic Hard
120. c_2B0508 103150568 PEF 6 The What to Restore page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Select the required item to restore In our case it is the first partition of the disk Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 182 L Primar 3 25GB 18GB BP Local Dak 1 Primary NTFS 37GB 2528MB 7 On the Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 8 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter desc Hard tisk U VMware Virtual IE hard Drive w Applicati ia Backup C 42 Unallocated s7cenTrs ssca 9 On the next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 183 Would you like to apply your changes 7 7 Yes apply the changes physically No let me reconsider gt 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Restomg fr
121. c_images Total data size 412 KB 3 Onthe Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Plese select how would you like to save the data Save data to local network dives Overwrite existing files Save data lo physical partitions Burn the data lo CD or DVD 4 On the Select Destination Path page specify the exact place to copy the data to Please select the destination path where to save the data from clipboard EX E Local Disk C E Ji are images El fi arc new El de archdo El de archive db Total data size 412 KB Space avalable on destination 489 8 GB 5 Onthe Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation Please overview the transfer options You can retum to the comesponding page and change the options by Object s selected 1 Total data size 412 KB 421 969 Bytes Transfer destinatice Destination path CS Space available on destination 4658 GB 525 927 419 904 Bytes Overwnite existing files No 6 Afterthe operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button Volume Explorer To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with Volume Explorer please do the following CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group Al
122. cally from the provided driver repository Generally together with new hardware you get its drivers for different operating systems on removable media mostly CD or DVD By collecting all these drivers in one folder you can let the wizard automatically pick and install only those required for your OS recommended e Upload drivers manually If you know exactly what drivers your operating system is lacking to successfully start up you can manually provide them for the wizard e Do not upload drivers And finally you can just refuse providing 3 party drivers ES Upload driver automatically from the provided driver repository Select this option you ve got a folder with mutima diver packages and want al required divers forthe new harda me lo be inatalled automaticaly Please mole only the necessary drivers wil ba ngeted io the selected OS Select this option you know encacth what drivers am required to make the selected 05 bootable on ha new harden E gt De not upload drivers Sa lect this option you dont ward lo insert Ord party divers lo the selected 05 We prefer the wizard to decide what drivers are to be installed 7 Browse for a folder with drivers for the new hardware or type in a full path to it manually Please chooss a folder that contains INF files T ry om aih gt rr Pr Pa M 3 XA programa Paragon Soktware program Tes Drives Browse 8 Apply the changes by confirming the operation
123. capsule will be created It can be created as a primary partition or as a logical drive within an extended partition It can be inserted into any place on the hard disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions On this page you can select a hard disk where a backup capsule will be crested as well as the relative postion of the capsule on the hard disk Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dew i a Local Disk C Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev i cd Archives 5 Use the buttons lo move the marker Backup capsule wil be created where the marker is me Gg By default the program allows the user to create the backup capsule only as the last primary or as the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating A N the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can remove this restriction that in its turn might result in some boot problems 4 Set the size for the backup capsule It will be created at the expense of free space of the selected disk Backup capsule current size is 245 3 GB Min capsule size D Bytes Max capsule size 49066GB There is no restriction on the size of the backup capsule merely depending on the available space of the hard disk and the capacity needed for the backup If the wizard cannot find enough free space in one block it will redistribute free space joining all free sp
124. ce if any will be automatically added to the target partition Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 103 Choose a volume to expand Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev td Local Disk C yy data Z Ik 27GB NITES a JGB NTFS Dh Cepesty of the volume C is 282 9 GB The wired can expand this volume up to 485 3 GB at the emence of other volumes wal pra e Partition to donate Choose any partition s not only adjacent to donate free space Select volumes to take space from Fret space from that volume wil be used to anlama the volume you have selected on ine previous page C LIDA a Fla system Type Capacty Uned space Free spaca Free NTFS Pimay 217 GB 4668 202 368 ol There is no unallocated space on the hard disk you have selected The wizard can only expand the volume C at the expence of some other volumes Please cock the check box next to any volume to taka free space from it e Partition size By default the program leaves 50 of the unused space on a partition and removes another 50 to add it to the target partition However the size to take can be customized by moving the slider or by manually entering the exact value Your disk after tha changes Basic TE ee e hah SSCS Dik kag a data 2 H 1 j 1158 GB NTFS
125. ch partition is selected The program enables to copy a partition only to a block of un partitioned space If you don t have a block of free space on your hard disk please delete or reduce an existing partition to accomplish the operation 6 cannot do anything with my USB flash drive get a crossed circle sign when trying to select any area on it Some USB flash drives don t have the MBR Master Boot Record that s the cause of your problem To fix the issue please use the Update MBR function of our program or fixmbr of the Windows installation disc to write a standard code to your flash drive 7 When trying to back up my system the program asks to restart the computer Most likely the Hot Processing mode is disabled Please make it active in the program settings 8 When backing up a partition with the VSS Volume Shadow Copy Service mode the program throws VSS could not be started for processed volume Most likely you try to back up a FAT32 partition which is not supported by VSS Please use the Paragon Hot Processing mode instead Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 243 9 I cannot back up my hard disk to an external hard drive Once started the operation is aborted with the following error Hard Disk management Error Code 0x1100a What is wrong here The problem is that the Microsoft VSS service is set as the default Hot Processing mode in the program But this service has not been
126. checkbox opposite the required item you can choose whether to display it or not Besides you can change its order by pressing the Move up or Move down buttons If you don t need the Disk Map please click the shown below icon to disable it 800 235 8F rh 0 20 21 SSD 61 14 235FEBO0 3E7FEFFPh 304D 61 15 FEFS 94 TE 800 JEFEFFAN J 20 21 FEFE 34 TE Properties Bar The Properties Bar provides information on the selected at the moment partition hard disk For a hard disk e Model e Serial number e Type of hard disk basic or dynamic e Total size in GB e Information on geometry of the disk amount of sectors per track heads and cylinders For a partition e Drive letter assigned to the disk Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 50 e Volume label if available e Type of the logical disk e File system represented by the color of the graph and the selected bar e Total size used space and free space in GB or MB Besides you can modify practically any partition property by clicking on the required value Legend Bar The Legend Bar explains the color scheme used for disk and partition presentation You can hide or show the bar with the appropriate Main Menu item View gt Disk Map Legend When it is activated it can be found at the bottom of the Explorer Bar The program distinguishes between the following types of known file systems FAT16 32 NTFS Linux Ext2 3 4 Linux
127. chnology to securely perform hard disk partitioning operations of any complexity e Paragon BTE technology to set tasks for execution in the Windows blue screen mode thus saving from the need to use a bootable media when modifying system partitions e Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista 7 Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept e Microsoft Dynamic Disk simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 5 to offer more management flexibility without the partition limitation of basic disks Dynamic storage can be particularly beneficial for large scale businesses when dealing with many physical hard disks involving complex setup e GUID Partition Table GPT It is the next generation of a hard disk partitioning scheme developed to lift restrictions of the old MBR GPT disks are now supported by Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Mac OS X and Linux Supported File Systems e Full read write access to FAT16 FAT32 partitions e Full read write access to NTFS Basic and all five types of Dynamic Disks under Windows 95 98 ME Linux and PTS DOS Compressed NTFS files are also supported e Full read write access to Ext2FS Ext3FS Ext4
128. computer This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environments IN To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive Let s assume that your Mac fails to boot because of a hard disk malfunction But you ve got a backup of your hard disk on an external USB drive Just replace the failed disk with a new one and carry out a bare metal restore CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 187 To restore a dual boot Mac from a backup image located on an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to the computer 3 Restart the computer 4 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since it s the only mode that enables to work with USB devices gt Normal Hode Main recovery d Safe Hode environment SL Low Graphics Safe Mode a Floppy disk Hard disk B MER 2 Find OSes on your hard disks A N By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second
129. conde it Tima to display the Boot Manager startup massage 15 seconds Hl Choose a hot key for startup BootManager F1 15 Now restart the computer to make sure you have got a dual boot system Windows XP Windows Vista If you ve got Windows XP and are willing to try the latest Windows Vista but not sure your favorite applications will flawlessly work on it the best way out is to leave the time proved Windows XP intact and install Windows Vista for studying purposes As this very situation is very close to the previous one please use the Windows Vista Windows XP scenario However please take into consideration one more step you need to accomplish if you decide to use the traditional scenario 1 Besides hiding of the system partition before installation of the second OS you need to make it inactive as well To do that please call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and launch the corresponding dialog Click the Yes button to continue Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 230 e o e Are pou sure pou want lo tel the volume az mactive You ate about to sel the volume Wing P NTFS at macie Tou compute may n longer bool corecily Ter 1 184 8 GB NTFS E NTFS M Fara E Fari Lira Ext Linus Ext Reviving the system partition In case you are not able or not willing to complete the mentioned above scenarios but have already reached the poi
130. consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 165 e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in Archives 6 e ER ZE r Sm Dale a HF j ae dk 9722009 5 25 00 AM G Ji are_doc 32 2009 5 05 42 AM 3 Ji arc_mages 9 3 2009 3 57 21 AM E Ji t _030909105713295 9 3 2009 3 57 22 AM Mar 020909105713295 Pp 68 3 KB 9 3 2009 3 57 22 AM O a e TAKE 4 3 2009 3 90 22 AM Local Disk Ne comment Mo label NTFS Total size 24GB J63MB Free soace 23GB fare images ct 30909105 713295 dR 030509105713295 PBF To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 On the Synthesis Settings page you can additionally modify any property of the selected backup image if necessary To accomplish our task we have no need to change anything at all Password protection COVOVD recording options 1 l i d E g Choose this option to allow writing of specie data that will later be used during restore to check the archive integrity i can sow down 7 Set image fle names automatically Choose this option to automaticaly name files in complex archive Noms compresor el Choose t
131. covery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu lt Normal Mode The PC boot ing d Safe Mode will be proceeded in amp Low Graphics Safe Mode AB seconds amp Floppy disk Hard disk MBR amp Find OSes on your hard disks AN By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager You can find it in PTS DOS as well Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 218 3 You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the pan please select the drive and one of its partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations Simple Restore Wizard Wipe Wizard Express Resize Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector
132. cting in the Main Menu Hard Disk gt Convert to Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 Set the required number of primary partitions if necessary According to the DOS partitioning scheme a hard disk can have up to four Primary partitions If there is an Extended partition on the disk only three primary partitions are allowed That is why if a GPT disk contains several volumes the program enables to choose the number of primary partitions The rest of them if any will automatically be converted to logical disks within the Extended partition CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved E23 side o Convert the basic GPT hard disk to a basic MBR hard dick ihr are more than four volumes on the disk oiy fhe first these may become primar and the resi logical The hard disk afer conver Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware riua S SCSI Diek Dev i New Volume H 19 8GE NTFS The resulted hard disk should have at least 1 primary parttion s Please select how many primary partitions you need E de The program can only process dynamic GPT disks containing solid simple volumes without extension Changing Primary Slot Different operating systems apply different approaches to enumeration of the primary partitions In Linux In Linux every partition has a special symbolic name that encodes a hard disk containing a partition and a partition itself Partitions are addressed and accessed by using their symbolic names Symboli
133. d dunng the inctalahon poces C want to use an esting pemary partition to install OS In case creaborn of a new primary parhhon is nol possible thee are already four piman partons on the disk of not desirable you are free to select any of easing pimay partitions Please note that al data on Ine selected partition wall be deleted F you choose to format later in this vazand Besides make sure no operating system has already been installed on that partition AN Only primary partitions can be used to install an operating system In case the first option has been marked the wizard enables to specify A hard disk if several where a new partition will be created Thanks to an advanced program engine it is possible to use unallocated space of the disk if any and unused space of existing partitions to create a new partition On tres page pou can choose a hard dek if several where pou would ike to cieale a new piman partition Basic Hard Disk 0 Maxtor Fr 250P0 lon A Ar ldo Wo iro Batic Hard Disk 1 57316081545 E a a D 534 GE NTFS EE EE GE NTFS A To avoid any possible problems the new partition will in no way be created as the first partition of the disk which already contains at least one partition And its size If there are blocks of the free space on the disk the wizard will merge them all and allocate the resulted space for a new partition in the first place If not it will take 50 of t
134. d to recover an accidentally deleted partition File System Optimization Facilities A 27 defragmentation strategies available to defragment FAT and NTFS file systems MFT defragmentation and shrinking to improve performance of NTFS Safe Defragmentation Mode to guarantee data loss free defragmentation of any version of NTFS and FAT Low free space defragmentation less than 1 of the free space required to successfully defragment almost full disks Defragmentation is accomplished with a separate component called Paragon Total Defrag To know more on the subject please consult its help CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 14 Wipe Facilities e Data wiping to successfully destroy all on disk information including the standard bootstrap code and other system service structures e Free space clearing to destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data Automatization Facilities e Task scheduling to automate routine operations It can be particularly effective when you have to repeat a sequence of actions on a regular basis A N Scheduling is only available for the Windows installation of the program e Scripting to make the program create a script of any set of operations you need Besides support of all operations available in the interactive mode the unattended mode provides some additional features such as conditional execution subroutines repeatable
135. detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become available Use OS built in format routine Piense select number of sectors per clueer 123 le Fiesse select number of sectors per bool Please select number of mol entes e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox to restrict the available values according to the used OS e Whether the surface test will be performed Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata e The amount of sectors per boot This parameter is available exclusively for FAT16 and FAT32 file systems Set the number of sectors to be reserved for the boot area on the partition with this spinner control e The amount of root entries This parameter is available exclusively for FAT16 file system Set the maximum amount of files directories to be placed in the Root Directory on the FAT16 partition e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 98 AN Number of available options depends on the selected file system type P Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition formatt
136. disk to CD DVD e Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Mount Partition The program enables to assign or remove drive letters of existing formatted partitions Assign Drive Letter In order to mount a partition you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Add Drive Letter dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Assign Drive Letter Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Assign Drive Letter 3 Specify a drive letter for the selected partition Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 131 0 Assign a drive letter This allows access to the volume by using the drive letter assigned The assognmmeni is not recommended f the volume contains a fe system mot supported by your operaling system Asegn the folewang dave letter a However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letters 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Remove Drive Letter In order to un mount a partition you should tak
137. drive There are five types of dynamic volumes simple uses free space from a single disk soanned created from free disk space that is linked together from multiple disks striped a volume the data of which is interleaved across two or more physical disks mirrored a fault tolerant volume the data of which is duplicated on two physical disks and RAID 5 volumes a fault tolerant volume the data of which is striped across an array of three or more disks With dynamic storage you can perform disk and volume management without the need to restart Windows Limitations e Dynamic disks are not supported on portable computers e Dynamic disks are not supported on Windows XP Home Edition based computers e You cannot create mirrored volumes or RAID 5 volumes on Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional or Windows XP 64 Bit Edition based computers Thus the dynamic disk is a new way of looking at hard disk configuration Dynamic disks offer you more management flexibility without the partition limitation of basic disks Dynamic disks can contain an unlimited number of volumes but they cannot contain partitions or logical drives Dynamic storage can be particularly beneficial for large scale businesses when dealing with many physical hard disks involving complex setup CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 34 GPT versus MBR GUID Partition Table GPT is the next generation of a hard disk partitioning sc
138. e 40 GB of a 160 GB hard drive for the OS 70 GB for storing video and another 50 GB for your favorite music collections to provide transparent data storage It is also worth mentioning to that with a hard drive properly partitioned such routine operations as files de fragmentation or consistency check will not be that annoying and time consuming any more By detaching the OS from the rest of the data you can tackle one more crucial issue in case of a system malfunction you can get the system back on track in minutes by recovering it from a backup image located on the other partition of the hard drive But that is not all drive partitioning may be used for If you are willing to play games in Windows while browsing the Internet in Linux 100 percent sure that no virus will attack your PC drive partitioning is a necessity In order to run several OSs on a single hard drive you are to create a corresponding number of partitions to effectively delineate the boundaries of each OS Data Sanitization Data security is a two sided problem It is to be made clear that providing confidentiality implies not only information to be stored properly but also be destroyed according to certain rules The first step to protecting yourself is to know exactly which security precautions work and which do not Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 36 Many people believe the misconception that repartitioning a disk will result
139. e a copy of the entire hard dk Al the partition on this disk wil be copied on the epecihed target disk The model and serial number of the disk serve as the title of the browsed page The disk layout is shown in form of a circular graph where the color of a sector corresponds to a file system of an appropriate partition On the right you may see a table which contains the following information e Type of hard disk basic or dynamic e Total size in GB e Information on geometry of the disk amount of sectors per track heads and cylinders Below there is a list of available wizards If you click a corresponding record the appropriate wizard will be started All default values for the operation parameters will correspond to the disk s settings The list of wizards contains a detailed description of tasks that can be performed by the wizard This nullifies the possibility of selecting the wrong wizard Logical Disk G Volume letter G Senal number ISS ASF Volume labek FAT 32 LINU Partition ID O06 FAT 32 Type Primary Total size 68GB File system F T32 Used space 5 7 GB Sector per boot 36 Free space 10E Sectors per cluster 3 Activity Inactive Hidden state Not hidden Create an image of the logical disk z Back up all the dala this logical dek contains Restore the logical disk from an image El Warning The operabon vall delete all the data on the logical disk and replace them from the image you have d chosen ou
140. e a new partition resize redistribution of free space to formatting of the newly created partition to a particular file system and checking its surface for bad sectors to avoid possible data loss Operating systems today are being supplied with basic tools of partitioning that only enable to create a partition in case there is enough unallocated space on the disk and then format it to the specified file system type Our program offers a handy Install New OS Wizard to easily carry out all the necessary operations to install a new operating system Startup There are several ways to start the Install New OS Wizard Express Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 106 e Click the Boot Management button and then select Install New OS Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Install New OS e On the Common Tasks bar click the Install New OS item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to install a new operating system The program offers two ways of installing a new OS i e to create a new primary partition for it or use an existing one Where vould you lke to metal an operating spem Ge want lo create a new primary partition to install OS Anew partition wall be created by using unallocated space of your hand desk or unused space of masting pavhhons It es the most prelerable way as no spem of users dala vall be affecte
141. e accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Creating a differential to a full partition backup To update an image of the selected partition please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Differential Partition Backup item of the Wizards menu Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 154 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Type Creation Date Source Ubaci Size E 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vriual S SCSI Disk Dev E 9 2 2009 5 20 25 AM New Volume F ts F 9 2 2008 5 11 41 AM Fledevel Archive JAR 9 2 2009 5 06 03 AM Fledevel Archive 4 Ha i pee D ar a PV i LA PA a e Name Local Disk C Volume label No label Fie system NTFS Total sze 43939GB Used space 8 5G8 Free space 491 4GB File G arc_system arc_system_PBF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description N h To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser lik
142. e aigenthm US Deb 5220 22M yl ti You can see ihe algortim desorption and sel the level of verficabor on the nod page Create your own Data Santizabion method You can create your own Data Sandization method In case you preferred to use a specific algorithm the next page of the wizard enables to get detailed information on the selected algorithm choose whether to carry out residual data verification or not specifying the percentage of sectors to check and estimate the time required to accomplish the operation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 120 Vite method US DoD 5220 22 M Dvere al addressable locations wih a character ds complement then a random character and ver y Erase passes court 3 Vety passes count 1 J Verdy wipe results Percentage of secion to check 100 Apormaimate wipe time 14 02 40 You can shop vering completely or partly by dsabing E or rediong permertage of sector to check Plesse note i would be a deviation fem US DoD 5220 22 M The current version of the program provides support of one military standard i e US DoD AN 5220 22 M In case you preferred to create a customized algorithm the next page of the wizard enables to define up to 4 wiping patterns number of passes for each wiping pattern and for the group of patterns The Mask spinner control allows you to set a two figure hexadecimal character value 00 by default The available range is
143. e backup capsule is bootable 2 In the boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux A N By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 In the Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well You can create delete and format hard disk partions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the pian please select the drive and one of ins partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Paragon Hard Disk Manager Simple Restore Wizard One Button Copy Wizard Wipe Wizard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector 7 Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Start the command line On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button On the What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image double click on it to proceed Select Image A ae A a E aS Sie a E jal E F i ad Bi iiag Engi i F Ai AA da E i t J On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided informa
144. e letters from Windows e Eject CD DVD e Command Line allows experienced users to execute any operation e Reboot the computer e Power off the computer To move within the menu please use the arrow keys of the computer keyboard Safe Mode When the Safe mode is selected the PTS DOS launch menu appears It has nearly the same functionality as for the Normal mode except the Network Configurator and Log Saver commands Besides due to certain limitations of the PTS DOS environment there is no possibility to burn CD DVD discs Low Graphics Safe Mode When the Low Graphics mode is selected the PTS DOS launch menu appears It has the same functionality and looks similar to the Safe mode but graphically simpler You can create delete and 2 Simple Restore Hizard format hard disk partitions 2 One Button Copy Hizard using this program which A File Transfer Hizard will start nou S Boot Corrector Upon the start please select the drive and one ol MM Start the command line its partitions or its free Reboot the computer space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Booting from the WinPE Recovery Media The WinPE recovery environment can be a real alternative to the Linux DOS recovery environment Providing nearly the same level of functionality it offers an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version does Startup To start working with the WinPE
145. e operating system Backup to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media is kept secure Backup to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Backup to an FTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection e Smart Backup Wizard to secure system and data with the minimal efforts possible With a unique intelligent work algorithm and a highly intuitive user interface you can easily back up exactly what you need the whole system e mail databases MS Outlook Express Windows Mail media files or office documents of the My Documents folder or any other files and folders e Sector backup to save not only all on disk information but also the system service structures It is ideal for making a backup image of an entire hard disk or system partitions to guarantee the operating system s working capability e Differential backup to a sector image to only archive changes since the last full sector based image thus considerably saving the backup storage space To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 12 e File backup to save information you really need If you only care about safety of your e mail database or particular documents and are not willing to waste the backup storage space this very feature will suit you at
146. e options Backup image options Paritioning options Copy and backup options Operations mode CD DVD recording options Pa Procesan OES Run during backup options Allow virtual moda Set this option on to camry out al the operations viduely You vil be able to commit the changes or rolback al of them or the las one F you switch this Emal options option off the operations wil be caried out immediately Operation dependency options Vrtual mode options Close progress dialog automatically rie System Conversion options Set this option on to automatically close the progress dialog after committing the Copy Backup exclude options changes Fie Backup exclude options Fie Backup include options Log fas options Vips opioa In this section you may configure the virtual mode e Allow virtual mode Mark the checkbox to enable the virtual mode It is an effective way of protection from any troubles since no operation will be executed until confirmation thus giving you a second chance to weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation We strongly recommend you to enable this mode e Close progress dialog automatically Mark the checkbox to automatically close the progress dialog after accomplishing operations CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 62 File System Conversion Options KO Edit settings o a gt 7 m Ma ike SENOS Options Backup image options oS File system conversi
147. e page CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 21 Partitioning Pa rt ti on n g What would you like to do Backup and Recovery Create Partition DA ae Copying and Migration Format Partition Formal partii n to a He system of your choise Note al date this patton soriana wi ba dastad Security and Optimization Delete Partition Delete misting partition and al data it contains Boot management Resize Partitions i Move border of adiacent pattions of tha same type bath logical or both primary to redsinbute space between them Note thes wizard covers oriy bane mars Y drengs f reste operator can be camed out with Egress Resize Vicar please Support Contacts swtch to Full Scale Launcher nghi chching on a patton you would like to resize and select Move Resize Partition gt Merge Partitions Merge two adiacent partitions vith the same fle system and the same type primary to primary orlogical to lagical Log Saver Prepare operation log flies to send lo Paragon s suport team To start up the traditional Launcher please click on Switch to Full Scale Launcher To know more on how to handle the product s interface and accomplish typical operations please consult the Windows Components chapter Building Recovery Media Recovery Media Builder can help you accomplish the following operations e Prepare the Linux DOS recovery environment included in the installation package on ext
148. e the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Remove Drive Letter dialog to define appropriate settings There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Remove Drive Letter Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Remove Drive Letter 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Modifying drive letter of the system partition will result in inability to boot the operating system After having processed partitions with installed software some programs may not run properly Downgrade NTFS Version With our program you can decrease version of an existing NTFS partition This feature can be particularly useful when for instance dealing with different versions of the Windows NT family operating systems In order to start the operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Downgrade NTFS Version dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Modify gt Downgrade NTFS Version e Onthe Explorer bar click on the current NTFS version Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 132 e Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map or on the Partition List then select the men
149. e them please mark the checkbox and specify additional filters on the next page of the wizard Resize options Remove free blocks between partitions not to keep blocks of free space between partitions on the targeted hard disk Copy data and resize partitions proportionally to make the program proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when upgrading the hard disk to a larger one Verification options This section allows you to define whether the Surface and or the Writing verification tests will be accomplished during the operation Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing hard disk To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally IN complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios e Migrating system to another hard disk Clone HDD One Button Copy Wizard The One Button Copy Wizard is a new approach of accomplishing such a technically complicated operation as cloning of a hard disk In fact with its help you can do it just by pressing one button Restrictions So to successfully accomplish the operation your system should meet the following requirements e Atleast two hard disks one of which should contain data and the other is empty e The destination hard disk should have enough space to take contents of at least first partition of the source disk
150. e whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Creating a cyclic partition backup To automate the partition backup process please do the following CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 162 Launcher Launch the Cyclic Backup Wizard by selecting in the Main Menu Wizards gt Backup Utilities gt Cyclic Backup On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button On the What to back up page select a partition you want to make a cyclic backup of Gick the check box neat to any hard disk dive or partition you want to back up ee Tes H E 1 My Computer E Mi F Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev El Mu E El E First Hard Disk Track First Track F Master Boot Record MBR P GP Loca Disk E Primary F BB Loca Disk 7 Primary E E Local Disk 1 Primary P Local Disk 7 Primary E E F Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual SCS Disk Dev a The sre of obiects to back up 499 9 GB Estimated archive size 7 2 GB A The current version of the program enables to make a cyclic backup of only one partition at IN a time On the Backup Destination page select a mounted unmounted partition a network share or an FTP server to place backup images to Select a
151. e window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in Archives G Eg Hame Size Date la W fe arc images oA SA AM El are_system 9 2 2009 2 41 04 AM LEGER 922009 2 41 04 AM 1968 9 2 2009 2 37 32 AM 156 Bytes 9 2 2009 2 41 03 AM H 663KB 9 2 2009 241 6 AM Local Disk C My system backup Mo label NTFS Total sizes 43939GB 85GB Free space 491 4GB G anc_system arc_syatemn_PBF Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 155 A N j To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 The Archive Content page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive It includes a full description of properties about the partition In addition there is the possibility to modify backup settings To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option at the foot of the page Mame Type File system Siza l Used Archive Detads Name Local Disk C Volume label No label Fie system NTFS Toa sre 4999GB Used space 85GB Free space 491 4 GE 5 On the Backup Destination page select where you want to place your backup image There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Fiese select how would you like to save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule Save data to physical partitions Save data to FTP locations Bum the dats to CO o
152. ector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation e Perform incremental copy to only copy changes on the hard disk from the moment of the last copy operation The program will perform comparison between a previous copy of the hard disk and its current state Only sectors that are different will be updated thus considerably decreasing the amount of data to write e Change masks for files to exclude from copy to manage contents of the resulted duplicate By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog If you need to change them please mark the checkbox and specify additional filters on the next page of the wizard e Copy without free space blocks to arrange partitions one after another e Resize proportionally to proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact To do that press the Pause button to continue execution press Start To interrupt the operation press the Cancel button CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 87 Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing hard disk To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Cloning Partitions You can dup
153. ed earlier can also be used here On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button On the What to back up page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 147 Gick the check box neat to any hard disk deve or partition you want to back up Name Type a H My Computer My Computer gt E F Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev internal Hard Disk Dis 3 E 5 First Hard Disk Track First Track _ El EP Master Boot Record MBR F E Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vitual 5 SCS Disk Dev Intemal Hard Disk Dris E First Hard Disk Track First Track F 5 Master Boot Record MBR SF Local Disk EJ Primary Local Disk 1 Primary Local Dek Primary BP Local Disk Primary 3 Fl F Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Dris 7 You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate A N checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 4 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to FTP locations option There are several ways the Vizard can store your data Please select how would you like lo save the archive Save data lo the Backup Capsule Save data lo FTP locations Burn the data to CD or DVD 5 Set up par
154. ed for a system administrator to install an operating system from scratch on every one of them It is enough just to configure one and then clone it to the others Drive Partitioning As you probably know a hard drive is to be split into one or more partitions since it cannot hold data until it is carved up and space is set aside for an operating system Until recently most PCs used to have just one partition which filled the entire hard disk and contained an OS The situation has changed however thanks to new cost effective high capacity hard drives thus opening up numerous possibilities for PC users such as editing video archiving music backing up CD images etc Huge increase in space is great but it poses a number of problems most important of which are effective data organization and speed Large drives are always going to take longer to search than smaller volumes and an operating system is going to have its work cut out both finding and organizing files It is for this reason that many people decide to invest in multiple hard drives but there is an easy solution drive partitioning Partitioning lets you divide a single physical drive into a number of logical drives each of which servers as a container with its own drive letter and volume label thus enabling the operating system to process data more efficiently Besides partitioning makes it possible to organize data so that it is easy to find and manage You can set aside for instanc
155. ed to the specified file system Deleting Partitions With the Delete Partition Wizard or the Delete Partition Dialog you can delete a partition on a hard disk partitioned with the DOS partitioning scheme Unlike the majority of other utilities Windows Disk Manager included the program can not only remove references to the deleted partition from the Partition Table thus making it unavailable for the operating system but also enables to irreversibly destroy its data This feature will guarantee security of your personal information Wizard Startup There are several ways to start the Delete Partition Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Partitioning button and then select Delete Partition Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Delete Partition e On the Common Tasks bar click the Delete Partition item of the Wizards menu Dialog Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Callthe Delete Partition Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Delete Partition e Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Delete Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to delete Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to
156. ee in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 176 Operations bist Suboperallon progress 1 Restore partition or disk Bananal o A Operation progress Banasa Time elapsed 00 00 31 Time to finish 00 03 47 Copied so far 223 9 Mb Read so far 276 0 Mb 23 0 Mb s To copy 1 66Gb White so far 276 0 Mb 27 6 Mbs Overall progress AA Restore Disk irom file jam 27090814520967 ar 270508145209671 PBF Opening archive arc_2 7050814520957 1_0000p 000 Restore Primary partition 0 disk 0 from file farc_27050814520967 l arc_270508145209671_0000p 000 Data writing 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a bootable DVD disc That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your system partition from a backup image located on CD DVD when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Insert a CD DVD disc containing the prev
157. empts to start Microsoft VSS e Switch between hot processing technologies Mark the checkbox to automatically switch between Paragon Hot Processing and Microsoft VSS if one of them is unavailable at the moment CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 57 0 By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Run during Backup Options Run during Backup Options Edit settings ai Run during backup options m me Jase PS pde a gee itioning optic am 7 End La TA ha Damm Lins El ari re 5 e Cooy and backup options For backup operations in the Paragon Hot Processing mode you have a possibly ti A PA worl ate e j 4 m f 5 habs mum EDWYDVO racordra oobione un sodemal programs and commands at diferent stages of the backup process Th Tar ha ur a e a e ney poli to ink such execution to amp a shor period of time when a snapshot is Lamer snapshol is a map of used blocks ihe system is totally frozen for witing when fis taken en ors E j j Plassas snaci executed files for each age F necessary Operation depandency options tual mode cobra Sxecute al the beginning of the backup process before taking a snapshot al LA a E 1a aprem Comanson options op Backup exclude options 50 a Backup exclude osters a a teca mie lanng a spent Execute afer finishing the backup process In this section you can specify external applications to execute at vario
158. en save this file to some other destination for instance a local drive and this way avoid constant re configuration just by providing a path to it So Click Save to file to save the netconfig ini file to the required destination Saving log files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind is stored in log files To prepare a log files package please do the following 1 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Click Log Saver 2 Inthe opened dialog browse for the required location of the log files package or manually provide a full path to it Click Collect to initiate the operation Path lo the target mp file Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operating system settings or the user documents Troubleshooter Here you can find answers to the most frequently asked questions that might arise while using the program 1 Itry to run an operation but the program claims my partition is in use and suggests restarting the computer There are a number of operations that cannot be performed while your partition
159. ended f the volume contains a fe system mot supported by your operating system Assign the following dive letter IY However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letters 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 133 The current version of the program allows the user to mount archives of separate partitions only There is no possibility to mount archives located on physical unmounted partitions or in the bootable capsule Archives will only be mounted for the current session and won t be available after the system restart It is strongly recommended not to un mount backup images with Windows Disk Manager or other third side software Remove Drive Letter In order to un mount a backup image you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a backup image in the Archive Database 2 Call the Unmount Archive dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Archives gt Unmount the Selected Archive Onthe Explorer bar select the Unmount Archive item Call the popup menu for the selected image right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Unmount the Selected Archive 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Test Surface The program enables to test surface of existi
160. eover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu F Normal Mode Main recovery Safe Hode environment SL Low Graphics Safe Mode a Floppy disk SD Hard disk HB HER a Find OSes on your hard disks By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select Boot Corrector You can find it in PTS DOS as well Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 168 J You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the Simple Restore Wizard stan please select the drive and one of its partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations Wipe Wizard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Start the command line 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page select the Correct the Master Boot Record MBR option Please choose the operation Search for Windows installations to correct 2 Correct the Master Boot Record MBR Correct the pa
161. epot Disk Viewer Sector lof 262144 Ox0000 00 00 00 00 6060 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 a 00010 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 020020 00 00 00 00 060 OO 00 00 060 OO OO 00 00 OO OO OO 020030 00 00 00 60 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00040 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO 00 00 OO OO 020050 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 OO 00 00 00 00 aa 0x00650 00 00 00 00 60 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00070 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 OO 00 0x0080 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO 00090 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 60 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 0x0040 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 OO OO 00 a 0x0080 60 00 00 00 OO 66 00 60 60 00 60 00 00 00 00060 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO 00 00 OO OO 0xb0Db0 00 00 00 00 060 OO 00 00 OO OO OO 00 OO OO 00 e O 00E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO 00 00 OO OO 0xD0F0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 OO OO OO 0x0100 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00110 00 00 OO 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0x0120 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 00 00 00 OO 00 OO OO OO 00 If 00130 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO A T F Please select sector number ae qq Previous Ep New gt Los AN The Summary page will be available only when the Virtual operations are disabled
162. er Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to it thus they won t be added to the backup image 7 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Exclude masks manage files and folders that wi be eeiuded from archive specify exclude masks Execulable amp inetallations E filters Add ike Rename category Delete category il Delete liter r voc Dete liber yad Desta fiber cab Duste fiter ma Delete Her map Delete fiter dre Delete liber Aacciliary files 18 fer Add ike Rename catagoy Delete category Add category l 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Plaase enter a hor commet to describe the archrre F Ry Ha commert 9 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 10 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process This operation can also b
163. ernal media CD DVD or flash memory to boot and run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes strongly recommended e Prepare a custom Linux DOS recovery environment by adding any data you like to the standard image e Prepare a bootable recovery environment from any ISO image including our WinPE 2 1 image strongly recommended e Create from the master CD the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment on a CD DVD disc or flash memory Below you can find how to build our WinPE 2 1 based recovery environment on a thumb drive CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 22 1 Plug in a thumb drive of at least 250 MBs in size Please note all data on that drive will be deleted 2 Launch the Recovery Media Builder There are several ways to do it e Inthe Main Menu select Tools gt Recovery Media Builder e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Recovery Media Builder item of the Wizards menu 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select the Flash Memory option o Hash Memory Seleci the optan to create the recovery environment on a flash memory med a Thus you will get al recovery features available in the program on a compact relable and fast device recommended Seleci the opbon bo crate the recovery environment on a CD DVD Thus you will aso gel a bootable CD or DVD with all recovery features avaldable in the program
164. et s take a closer look at them all to understand what kind of storage is able to provide better security e You can place a backup image to a local mounted or unmounted without drive letter assigned partition Despite the fact that it is the most convenient way try not to use it You can delete your backup just by accident or lose it as a result of a hardware malfunction or a virus attack e You can place a backup image to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and system independence e You can place a backup image to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in the operating system However it won t help you in case of a hardware malfunction e You can place a backup image to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media is kept secure e You can place a backup image to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Moreover by storing it on a special purpose server you may be pretty sure nothing will happen to it e Finally you can place a backup image to an FTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection Known Issues
165. etwork Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Start the command line 5 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source 4 My computer W Root din My Computer My computer Wi mnt Mounted resources W immnidisk Local disks Wi media Removable disks L IDE CD DVD NECVMWa VMware IDE CORI SCA NTFS Oor Disk 01 WinxP1 e DA NTFS lon disk 0 Application El BackupCapsule 7 on Disk 01 UFSD di 7 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Clipboard Source 55 mntdiskhdal Documents and Settin 0 mnydisk hd a1 Documents and Settin O E Mail Database Favorites k E ln y e Total data size n a Rename FE Delete FE Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 8 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item Please select how would you like lo save the data Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local moumed or physical partition to USB or Fire Ware external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to O Bur
166. eu E E ee dancas 16 HOw to DOwnlOad Updates UPS in A ASA AA AA 17 Contacting Paragon Technology GmbH iia aia 18 System Requirements nia 18 CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Windows Dased set Of UAM Seria 18 Lint DOS passed recovery environne Nens a n iaa 18 WINPE Dased recovery environment eironi an E A cd 18 Adainonaregure ment cienia E E A 19 Installation 19 Elststa oia ea 20 BUNGING RECOVERY Mediana ida 21 Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media ocooocooccocconccnoccnaconocnnconaronoronconaronornnconaronarnnccnaronaranccnarons 23 A A AA 23 BOO Mel SANO 23 Booting from the WinPE Recovery MeCia cscecsccscscscsccscsceccccccscsccccecscececcecscnceccccscnceccecscuceseececscesescececes 25 SLU cds 25 BasiCcCONCOp Sian rad ri 27 System and Data Pole ClO sai a aa EEE ETRAF 27 Fle Backup versus Sector BACKUP csse sia 27 BAUTISTA E Mowmataasioaan a miaeabaetettstin 28 BackUp TO TES NS ios 30 PECANS EIN CP DE EOC COIE RECIO PEO a a a outa Sa bua ae a a ea tae cuaauinta anniek eoutanios 30 Paragon Hot Processing Volume Shadow Copy Service csccscsssccccscsccccccscsccccccscsceccccscncescccecsceseccecnces 32 Offline versus Online Data PROCESS IMS esla lidia 32 Paragon HOUProcessing TechnoloS Weiss ridad 32 Volume Shadow COPY SERVICE e e Ate lth e e o AR 32 DV NAMIC DISKS sara SA OS SS NAAA Ss 33 GP Eversus MBR pico IAN EE ASA ANO CAER PEN IR 34 A PIe BOOL CMD asas 34 ey co a Uo
167. ew link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in E Local Disk C le EA Ye Sine Date a 9422008 5 11 18 AM 9 2 2009 5 11 18 AM 101 2KB 92 2009 5 11 41 AM ACA EIA A Archive Fie Details Comment images Backup date 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Total sive 113 1 KB 115 869 Bytes Archive size 1012 RB 103 723 Bytes Fia Cope magen FLO00000000000000000 archive pii A N To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected file archive It is placed into the same destination as the base image This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Backing up with Smart Backup Wizard To let Smart Backup Wizard help you back up exactly what you need and then place the resulted image to the required location please do the following Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 161 Launcher 1 Click the Smart Backup item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe What to back up page click on the section you find answering to your task Disks or Partitiona Back up your hard dak ora separe partion E mail Back up ema
168. f your volume Plesse enter new volume label Mew Volume 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Change Partition ID Partition ID is a file system identifier It is saved in the Partition Table and is used to quickly detect a partition of the supported type By manually changing its value you can manipulate accessibility of partitions In order to change a partition ID you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Change Partition ID dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Modify gt Change Partition ID Onthe Explorer Bar click on the current partition ID Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Change Partition ID Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 114 3 Seta new ID for the selected partition T Are you sure you want to change system ID of the partition F Curent system IID is 007 NTFS Changing system 10 might prevent some operating systems from working with the partition o Pease select predefined ID from the ket 0 07 NTFS Pisase enter ID manually e Predefined ID Select from the pull down list the required ID e Enter ID manually With the spinner control set the required ID value It has to be a 1 2 digit hexadecimal
169. g Saver Eject CD DVD Start the command line E AN 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source CA NTFS on Disk 01 Winx Y My computer Root din My Computer My computer Wi mnt Mounted resources W immidisk Local disks Wi media Removable disks a 1 IDE CO DWD NEC VMWa Vihware IDE COR al E NTFS 0 or Disk 01 WinxP e DA NTFS 1 on Disk Applic ation e E BackupCapsule on Disk 0 UFSD di remde ro Delete Fa 6 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source Imnydisk hdal Documents and Settin G mnydisk hd a1 Documents and Settin Al 5 i i im rondas m Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 200 7 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Burn data to CD DVD item Please select how would you like lo sawe the data Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USA or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want lo save the archive to Burn data to CD DVD Choose thi
170. g system settings or the user documents The Send Log Files function is only available when outgoing mail server SMTP and the user e mail address are properly set To learn more about it please consult the Settings Overview chapter View Logs With a handy dialog you can study logs on any operation carried by the program To make this job as easy as possible all the information is structurally divided besides there is the possibility to see the disk layout before and after an operation what is very convenient In order to view logs on carried out operations call the View Logs dialog in the Main Menu Tools gt View Log Files farted 12009 at 12 40 12 AM Ariahed al 1240 29 Started 412009 at 12 40 45 AM Frished at 12 41 21 Started 912009 at 12421 AM Frished at 12 44 29 Stated 912009 at 124504 AM Frished at 12 45 12 D Sated 912009 at 1245 39 AM Frished at 1 23 51 T Stated 922009 at 9 14 40 AM Firished al 9 21 28 AM No operations have been found lar tha selected sesson D Stated 9 2 2008 at 9 30 36 AM Finished at 9 41 04 AM E Stated 322009 at 9 41 05 AM D Seated 922009 at 12 19 48 PM Arished at 12 20 26 D Sate 9 2 7008 at 1220 26 PM Frished al 12 24 46 Stated 3 2 2009 at 12 24 45 PM Stated 9 2 2008 at 12 06 15 PM Arished at 120747 D Seated 3 2 2008 at 12 07 47 PM Firished at 12 21 18 Stated 3 2 2009 at 1221 18 PM Frished at 12 30 15 Started 3 2 2008 at 12 30 15 PM Airiabed at 12 31 33 Started 422008 at 1231239 PM H
171. ge as described in Online Distribution 0 The WinPE recovery environment can only be obtained through the company s web service You will get the required download link after the product has been purchased Online Distribution Hard Disk Manager 2010 purchased over the Internet will be in form of an MSI package After installing the product you can launch the Recovery Media Builder to build the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery media j The WinPE recovery environment can only be obtained through the company s web service You will get the required download link after the product has been purchased Registration Paragon Technology GmbH provides a wide range of online services through its web portal www paragon software com support e Registration of new users e Registration of purchased products for registered users e Available around the clock downloading center where registered users can get product updates upgrades as well as all the necessary documentation e Downloadable free demo versions and open documentation for all users Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 17 It is recommended to use Internet Explorer 5 or any compatible browser To register as a new user To register as a new user please do the following 1 4 Run an Internet browser and visit the page www paragon software com my account Click Create of the Create a Paragon Account section Fill out a registr
172. ght 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 205 TL tek TELA E TA EaU i 20 10 PM L R img_0_310708_072009875 PBF 227KB 7 30 2008 3 20 10 PM E NIT ted 16 470 tdee 2367 13 2eb0Fe502 200231070 7 30 2008 3 52 28 PM Fjimg_0_310708_075228187 PBF PAT KB 7 90 2008 3 52 28 PM 1 768 7 30 2008 3 55 41 PM 1268 7302008 3 57 46 PM 072008 2 6 On the next page specify what you need to extract from the backup by marking checkboxes next to the required data items At the right lower corner of the window you can see the resulted amount of the selected data 7 Onthe How to Restore page specify the way the selected data will be restored In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well 8 On the Restore Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 206 Please overview the restonse opbons You can rebum to the comesponding page and change the options by cliking store s selected 1 Total dala size 1 7 KB 1 741 Bytes Space available on destination 168 1 097 545 6596 Byes 9 On the next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option Would you like to apply your changes r une 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time
173. ghtO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 58 0 By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Hot Processing Options By clicking the Browse button you can get into the browser like window to choose an executable file C Select a file to run Eso Look in 5 Local Desk C4 ER Y Hame Size Date 5 Local Disk C H Je archive db 9 2 2009 5 39 22 PM a Ji Perflogs 21132009 7 37 05 PM E Le Program Files 8 2 2009 5 38 26 PM a Ji Users 8 11 2009 12 18 49 PM H Je Utis 8 11 2009 1 32 53 AM Hi Windows 9 2 2009 5 38 40 PM By autoexec bat 24 Bytes 6 10 2009 2 42 20 PM EA somecmed cmd 0 Bytes 4 2 2009 5 54 00 PM 4 5 BD ROM Drive De OFFICE12 EN Files al type Executable Files To ns The program provides the ability to work with three types of executable files exe bat cmd It is up to the user to write batch files to safely prepare applications for backup There are some certain general requirements for that e All programs and commands must execute sequentially and finish before the bat file completes its work e Itis recommended to use external commands programs in the following format Start wait program exe The wait option will help to start an application and wait until it completes its work This will guarantee that all included commands programs complete their execution before the batch file does This function is only available when the Hot Processing mode is
174. ging backup tasks with the new Task List and Archive View Product Components In order to cope with different tasks the product contains several components e Windows based set of utilities is the crucial part of the product With the help of an easy to use launcher you may find and run tasks of any complexity in the field of data and system protection hard disk partitioning and cloning etc e Linux DOS based recovery environment is a multi platform bootable media that enables to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes Both platforms have their strong sides for instance Linux can boast support of FireWire i e IEEE1394 or USB devices It enables to burn CD DVD disks However there can be some difficulties with detecting new hardware DOS in its turn has no problems of that kind but is limited in features The Linux DOS recovery environment requires no installation and can be of great help when the system fails to boot Besides it offers a Windows XP like environment e WinPE based recovery environment Especially for keen followers of Windows our product also offers a WinPE 2 1 based bootable media Unlike the Linux DOS recovery environment it can boast an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version can However ts system requirements are much tougher Features Overview This chapter dwells upon key benefits and technical highlights
175. gned to minimize your participation in finding an appropriate place for it and its resulted size The only thing you re to do is to choose between several modes The most relevant thing here is the amount of space that will be allocated for that partition For easy perception you can see the resulted disk layout on the disk map by selecting this or that mode CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 210 The result you will pel after applying the changes Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Pease select the method of new partition crestian Take all unallocated space at the end of the disk a Smart Mode Use 243 3 G6 to create apat More info D Advanced Mode Uze 141 4 GE to reste a partten More mis The number of available methods depends on your disk layout To learn more on the way the wizard works please click the corresponding link on the first page of the wizard 4 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do with the system partition resize like we do in our case you will be asked to restart your computer in a special boot up mode to accomplish the operation So click the appropriate button to agree q Express Create Partition Wizard PIE Creating the partition The Wizard is now cresting tha partition System restart is required to complete the operation What wou
176. greement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Click Load Drivers 2 Inthe opened dialog browse for an INF file of the required driver package located on a floppy disk local disk CD DVD or a network share Then click the Open button to initiate the operation i wb i om i 18 2009 10 31 34 182009 m p mm m pmm A Be 182009 10 31 53 Ph 5 t O iM in in 8 8 KE 7 9 KE 12 2008 12 2008 1 21 12 AM Ms o ee e E ip EEA A N To know how to map a network share please consult the Configuring network scenario 3 You will be notified on the successful accomplishment of the operation Click Yes to load another driver or No to close the dialog drivers Yes _ Our WinPE 2 1 recovery environment is 32 based thus you need to use 32 bit drivers for YN injection CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 240 Configuring network If your local network has a DHCP server a network connection will be automatically configured once our WinPE recovery environment has been started up Otherwise you will need to do it manually with a handy dialog by providing an IP address a network mask default gateway etc Besides with its help you can easily map network shares To manually set up a network connection and map a network share please do the following 1 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Click Configure Network
177. hard disk or unused space of austin partons E la the most preferable way as no system or user s data wil be seged dunng the nstalation process want io use an eedsting primary partition to install OS hn case createn of a new pimay pation is not possble there are already four pimay partons on the desk or not desrable you ane free to select any of existing pemary parttions Please note that all dats on the selected partition wil be deleted F you choose to format later in this wizard Besides make sure no operating sem has Haady been nstalad on that partion 4 On the next page of the wizard define size of the new partition If the selected hard disk contains blocks of free space the wizard will automatically merge them all and allocate the resulted space to create the partition If not it will take 50 of the unused space of an adjacent partition thus resizing it You can select ether a block of unalocaled apace of the disk or an mosting partition unused space of which wil be served lo create a new partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev p t Vista C 158 7 GB NTFS mi i Mew volume current size la 341 2668 aa LI 2 Ta A EL E A md naa in Volume Sure 0 Bytes lol Max Volume Size 247 26 5 The next page enables to specify a file system and a number of additional parameters Since we are going to install Windows XP the most preferable file systems are NTFS and FAT32 Click the
178. hat dent contain any data This allows you to keep the pritong content after move exact as it was but wil regure more time 13 Apply all introduced changes By default our program works in the virtual mode of execution so you have to confirm all operations to let the program accomplish them To do that just click the Apply button on the Virtual Operations Bar Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Do not show this message again mare VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev 14 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition Let s assume you ve got two partitions on your hard disk the first one takes about 40 of all the disk space and is exclusively used for Vista 64 bit while the second servers as a data storage One day you realize that your system partition doesn t need so much disk space that s what your data partition really requires at the moment You can easily tackle this problem with Paragon Linux DOS Recovery CD To increase size of a data partition by taking unused space from a system partition please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the re
179. hat you re busy with developing some project and you make file increments of it on a day to day basis not to lose valuable information So you ve got a file backup chain One day you understand that the job of the last three days is a complete and utter failure Don t give up recover your project to the state when everything s ok To restore a file increment please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Restore item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 190 e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any T Show al z amp B fk Type Creation Date Y Source Dibject Sure q 1 ll 5 3 2009 7 10 36 AM Fledevel Archive 444 KB amp 3 3 2009 3 57 21 AM Local Disk 2468 El 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev 10GB E 3 2 2008 5 20 25 AM Neve Volume F 24GB IF 3 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Filedevel Archive 113 1 KB F 9 2 2009 5 06 03 AM Filedevel Archive 4 KB E 9 2 2009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk 459 5 GB El 9 2 2009 2 21 01 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SC51 Disk Dev 10GB f E Pechive Fie Det Backup data 9 3 2009 7
180. he current volume label is displayed above e Do not ask volume label next time Mark the option to inhibit confirmation next time you start the dialog Result By default the operation takes only a fraction of a second However the program waits until Windows completes the modification of the disk layout Advanced Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish advanced partitioning operations merge redistribute free space undelete etc CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 100 Merging Partitions The Merge Partitions Wizard enables to consolidate the disk space which originally belongs to two adjacent partitions into a single larger partition The order in which two partitions have been chosen is important since all contents of the second selected partition will be placed in a folder on the resulted joined partition The program provides the ability to merge only NTFS FAT16 or FAT32 partitions Startup There are several ways to start the Merge Partitions Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Partitioning button and then select Merge Partitions Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Merge Partitions e On the Common Tasks bar click the Merge Partitions item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e The partition to expand Select a partition the size of which you need to increase by up taking contents of
181. he following steps Express Launcher e Click the Partitioning button and then select Log Saver Launcher 1 Call the Send Log Files dialog in the Main Menu Tools gt Send Log Files 2 Provide a customer name and a product serial number 3 Give a detailed description on the encountered problem Send log files Send log Tiles Please enter short description of your problem and send log files to support Customer Mame John smith fde GStec ad c 7da 8 24 7d Content of inquiry Help By clicking the Send button the built in mail client will generate a template request with attached compressed log files and then send it to the Paragon Support Team Log Files Log files are simple textual files that can be opened by any text editor There are several log files automatically generated by the program Stubact log Contains in depth information on parameters and performance of all operations carried out by the program Pwlog txtil Besides brief overview on operations it also contains detailed information about the state of all hard disksk CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 139 Cdb log Contains low level information on the CD DVD devices used in the system BioNTlog txt It is an OS dependent supplementary log file derived from Bioxx dll It may contain or valuable information on Windows family operating systems Bio95log txt Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operatin
182. he size of the volume These defaults are selected to reduce the amount of space that is lost and the amount of fragmentation on the volume A cluster is also called an allocation unit Extended Partition is a partition type you create only on a basic MBR Master Boot Record disk Extended partition is used if you want to create more than four volumes on a disk since it may contain multiple logical drives File System Metadata The servicing structures of a file system which contain information about allocating files and directories security information etc are named the file system metadata It is invisible for users and regular applications because its accidental modification usually makes a partition unusable Hard Disk Geometry Traditionally the usable space of a hard disk is logically divided into cylinders cylinders are divided into tracks or heads and tracks are divided into sectors The triad of values Sectors per Track Tracks per Cylinder Amount of Cylinders is usually named the Hard Disk Geometry or C H S geometry Tracks and cylinders are enumerated from 0 while sectors are enumerated from 1 These disk parameters play an essential role in the DOS Partitioning scheme Modern hardware uses an advanced scheme for the linear addressing of sectors which assumes that all on disk sectors are continuously enumerated from 0 To allow backward compatibility with older standards modern hard disks can additionally e
183. he system be operable again 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu Normal Mode d Safe Hode SL Low Graphics Safe Mode amp Floppy disk Hard disk BA ABR a Find OSes on your hard disks By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well A You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the Simple Restore Wizard stan please select the drive and one of its partitions or its tree space Then activate the Parition pull down menu and se
184. he unused space of an adjacent partition However the size to take can be customized by moving the slider CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 107 You can select ether a block of unallocated space inom the desk or an esti partition Los whech the unused pace wall be used lo create a new pation Batic Hard Disk 0 Maxtor Fr 250P0 E oC aj EE 162 1 GB NTFS E 515660 Ne New volume cument size i 51 6 GB Min Volume Sire U Bytes Max Volume Sue 1565 GE In case the second option has been marked the wizard enables to choose an existing primary partition to install a new operating system On this page pou can choose an eining primary parbbon Where pou would ike lo inclall a new operating system Basic Hard Disk 0 Maxtor PY250P0 i au oan Basic Hard Disk 1 51316081545 A E Ji 634 GB NTFS 66 GB NTFS AN Your computer may fail if any other OS has already been installed on the selected partition e Partition properties Yes want to formal the partition Partition type NTFS v Assgr the lolowng dive letter DELS Surlace lest lavet Mone Partition type From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only file systems that can be correctly placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly forma
185. heme developed to lift restrictions of the old MBR Being a part of the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI standard proposed by Intel to replace the outdated PC BIOS it offers a number of crucial benefits e Upto 128 primary partitions for the Windows implementation only 4 in MBR e The maximum allowed partition size is 18 exabytes only 2 terabytes in MBR e More reliable thanks to replication and cyclic redundancy check CRC protection of the partition table e A well defined and fully self identifying partition format data critical to the platform operation is located in partitions but not in un partitioned or hidden sectors as this is the case with MBR Apple Boot Camp Boot Camp is a special utility to help you set up a dual boot system Mac OS X and 32 bit Windows XP Vista on Intel based Macs It enables to securely re partition your hard disk resize an existing HFS partition to create a separate partition for Windows and then launch the installation process With Boot Camp all the necessary drivers will be at your disposal Moreover after Windows has been installed it will serve as a boot manager to choose what operating system to start up It is strongly recommended not to modify the hard disk configuration with Windows Disk Manager Otherwise it may lead to unexpected consequences right up to BSOD and A N inability to boot in Windows XP Vista Please use our program to correctly update both MBR and GPT 64 bit Support The
186. his optien to enable solitting the archive lo several files Magnum spit size 2000 ME 5 On the Synthetic Archive Destination page select where you want to place the resulted backup image CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 166 There are several ways the Vizard can sore your data Please select how you would like fo save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule Save date to local network dives Save date to physical partitions Save data to FTP locations Bum the data to OD or DVD 6 Edit the archive name if necessary archive delads Archive name ar 0309051 10023030 Estmated archive size 31 MB Space avalable on backup destination 490 3 GB available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space drive needs to be selected 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a hor comment to describe the archive d A Mo comment 8 On the Synthesis Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Please ovendew the backup options You can retum to the comesponding page and change the options by Name Guiarc_images d 0305051057132547 _030909105713295 PBF Location Gvam images di 030909107132 aF Type Partibon Version 131088 Commen Mo comment Pas
187. i Backup each parition sector by sector Al sectors will ba processed one one even unused sectors Requires more ime lo complete the operation Perfoem incremental copy This option is intended for copying only changes on the hard disk since a previo Copy Operacion The pro arar performs comparison between a previous copy oF 1 Aia Backup include opbans hard of i paer si AA A hard disk and its current sate Only sectors that are differen wi be writen to as m A ee me ee I pr H Cop ge nipe pugna J Skip OS aundliary files Choose this option to skip 05 acodliary files fice pagefie sys hbefi sya eto TF wil reduce operation time and backup image size Ej Fira reis ll J Skip archiva fies stored in archiva Lay Choose this opion to skip archiva fies stored in archive library Tne wil reduce operation time and backup image siz OK Carcel This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during copy and backup operations IN HDD raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy back up a hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Partition raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy a partit
188. ibutive CD of Windows XP to install it To automatically start your computer from this CD make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD first or press F12 during startup to select a bootable device Do not forget to select the newly created partition as destination Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 229 Alba Ea ThE r m 4 e la z P e LNE FOLLOWING List ENDE Che unpartitioned Space on his pa A HRHOW keys to si the ui part itioned lt pace Jartition press OD Installation of Windows XP will make Windows Vista non bootable 12 Launch the Boot Manager Setup wizard As your Windows Vista is non bootable any more you need to install our program once again but this time in Windows XP to activate Boot Manager AN To avoid double installation please use our WinPE recovery environment to activate Boot Manager 13 Click Boot Management and then select Boot Manager in the Express Launcher 14 Set up the Boot Manager wizard The most relevant option here is the possibility to hide other primary partitions except the one selected to boot and it is by all means should be activated to make Windows Vista and Windows XP unaware of each other The rest of the parameters offered by default will do in our case so just complete the wizard and it will automatically find the two operating systems and update the MBR 9 Timecut for booting last used configuration 15 se
189. idle period 5 Inthe Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard i A You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the star please select the drive and one of its partitions or its free space Then activate the Panition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations Simple Restore Wizard Wipe Wizard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Sian the command line 6 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 188 7 On the What to Restore page click the standard browse button to find the required archive When done double click on it to select Select archive leo_wista 8 Onthe Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Disk preview AAA to Apple HES leopard NTFS Ho label Basi Disk 0 Size 112 Gb Primary FATIG 200 Mb 150Mb Nolabel Primary Apple HES 649Gb 142Gb leopard 56Gb WSGb Molabeln image of the hard disk 113 0528 Nd4 eo_vistaleo_vista pbi 2008 May 29 Thd 21 16 51 To comiinue restore process click Next 9 On the next page specify a hard disk to restore the image to
190. ights reserved Extra Scenarios Tor WINPE iio 239 Addine specie IV caida as 239 COMPPURING MetWoOrK acia 240 SA vac cic we aac nach Leese Aa eae ace 241 TROUDICSIOOLON adsl 241 O RL 243 CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Introduction Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 Server is an integrated set of powerful tools that is specially designed to tackle most of the problems you might face while using PC Its functionality covers all aspects of a computer life cycle beginning from carrying out all the necessary partitioning operations to install the system from scratch and providing its data reliable protection to secure utilization of an outdated hard disk In this manual you will find the answers to many of the technical questions which might arise while using the program A Our company is constantly releasing new versions and updates to its software that s why images shown in this manual may be different from what you see on your screen What s New in Hard Disk Manager 2010 Next generation Adaptive Restore P2P Adjust OS to successfully migrate a Win2K physical system to a different hardware platform P2P by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for a migration of this kind Easy Partition Resize to resize partitions directly on the Disk Map with the drag and drop technique Express Create Partition Wizard to create a new partition in the most app
191. ike but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to it thus they won t be added to the backup image 6 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 159 Exclude masks manage fles and folders that wil be exuded from archive specify exclude masks Executable amp installations 2 fitar Add fiter Rename category Delete category dl Delete fter EXE seta 1 ocx Delete iter wed Delete fier ma Delete fiber Aacciliary files 18 fer Add fke Rename category Delete category 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a hor comment to describe the mche E Na Mo comment 8 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 9 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to
192. in complete destruction of its contents Actually that is not quite so Repartitioning the drive only alters references to partitions in the Partition Table leaving all file data intact In fact there are a number of programs available to successfully recover previously deleted partitions Formatting a drive also does not guarantee data destruction Formatting procedure implies modification of the Master File Table MFT that keeps track of where file contents are stored on the disk and verification of each sector for consistency Even a low level format does not actually erase the file contents for good since they can still be resurrected from their deleted state with minimal effort by using the popular today Magnetic Force Microscopy technology The only way to make sure that all the data has been erased from a hard drive is to overwrite all on disk sectors with random patterns of ones and zeros Although this sounds complex there is an easy way to do this The process of deliberately irreversibly removing or destroying the data stored on a memory device magnetic disks flash memory drives etc is generally known as Data Sanitization A device that has been sanitized has no usable residual data and even advanced forensic tools should not ever be able to recover it thus providing maximum level of security Scheduling The automation of operations is particularly effective when you have to repeat a sequence of actions on a regular basis For e
193. in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 195 Suboperation progress A IA EE Restore partition or disk m wer Paracon Hork time 00 00 55 Tine to finish00 00 26 Done 521 MB Read 532 MB 35 2 MB s All 8 71 GB Hrite 532 MB 53 2 MB s Overall progress Loading Paragon Engine Copright Copyright 1988 2008 Paragon Technologie GabH All rights reserved Please walt Universal File System Driver initialization Getting partitions info Flushing system buffers please walt Restore dali partition disk 0 from file G arc_systes arc_ system PEF Data writing To avoid data loss please do not reset or turn off the computer Operation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the computer AN This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk To retrieve valuable information from your hard disk and copy it to another hard disk when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Connect the second hard disk to the computer 2 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc
194. ince no operations will be executed until clicking the Apply button for confirmation thus giving a second chance to weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation The program politely reminds the user that there are unsaved changes by showing the following window UO There are unsaved changes Please use the Y Apply command to comer the changes and the J Discard command lo permanently undo the charges fou can mew the changes history via the LL View Changes command and lemporardy undo or pedo the operation by means of the Undo and Redo commards Common Tasks Bar The Common Tasks Bar is located on the left side of the main window It is intended for easy access to the program s wizards The bar contains several tabs named Basic Partitioning Tasks Advanced Partitioning Tasks Copy Tasks Backup Tasks Tools and News and Documentation Each of these contains a separate button bar which can be folded by clicking it Basic Partitioning Tasks Starting the Express Create Partition Wizard to create an NTFS partition and make it ready for work lt i Create Partition Starting the Create Partition Wizard to create a partition of any file system Ds Starting the Format Partition Wizard to format an existing partition to one of the 3 Format Partition file systems supported by the program Sui 7 Starting the Delete Partition Wizard to delete a partition of any file system Delete Partition Advanced Pa
195. ind bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata The amount of sectors per boot This parameter is available exclusively for FAT16 and FAT32 file systems Set the number of sectors to be reserved for the boot area on the partition with this spinner control The amount of root entries This parameter is available exclusively for FAT16 file system Set the maximum amount of files directories to be placed in the Root Directory on the FAT16 partition The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control AN Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition Available operation scenarios Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest of data Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 95 Formatting Partitions Any partition should contain some file system to be used for keeping data The process of installing a file system is commonly known as formatting A huge variety of file systems have been developed these days Supported File Systems The program provides the ability to format partitions of the following file systems FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 NTFS Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 Linux Swap v 2 This operation can be accomplished either with the Format Partition Wizard or the Format Partition
196. indispensable in case your computer does not support booting from USB dives 5 Select the User specified CD DVD image iso file option then browse for an ISO image of our WinPE 2 1 recovery environment or manually type in a full path to it By selecting the Typical option you can build our Linux DOS recovery environment which we highly recommend you to do as well Typical Lise the standard Recovery Media image supplied with the program User specified CD DVD image iso file Use CD DVD image from specific location E Donnmivads Paragon inpe20 _BR10_Sute aam iso Erowsa Copy from a CD DVD Choose a source CO DVD dive 0 _ You can get an ISO image of our WinPE 2 1 recovery environment through the company s web service 6 Select the required thumb drive from the list of flash memory devices available in the system at the moment if several Fralable dives 7 You will have to confirm the operation A WARNING As a result of this operation ALL DATA on the fash memory media will be ERASED Click OR A you agree or Cancel if you de not Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 23 Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media The Linux DOS recovery environment can be used to boot your computer into Linux or PTS DOS to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes It also has the PTS DOS safe mode which may help in a number of non standard situations such
197. indows Vista Windows XP Suppose you have got Windows Vista coming with your brand new computer Everything is great except one thing your favourite applications simply reject to work correctly on it Software updates are expected to release in the near future but you cannot wait any more Thus the best way out is to leave Windows Vista intact and install the time proved Windows XP Most likely you have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system To install the second operating system you need to repartition your drive first as it requires a separate primary partition If this is the case you can do your job either with the Install New OS Wizard a specially designed tool for that or traditionally with a number of the corresponding wizards and dialogs Install New OS Wizard A This scenario implies that operating systems will be installed on different partitions to amp provide better security and system independence Express Launcher 1 Click Boot Management and then select Install New OS in the Express Launcher 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 223 3 Select the appropriate option to create a new primary partition on your hard disk Where would you lice to instal an operating system want to create a new primary partition to install OS Anew pation val be crated by using unafocated space of your
198. ing its contents Ahe EXI Connie nt Please enter backup comments to describe the archive Archive Img_D0 pbf created 200806 05 13 42 39 12 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately or generate a script CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 151 13 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment or under JN Windows Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition To back up required files or folders and then place the resulted image to a local mounted unmounted drive please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Back up Files item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe What folders and files to back up page you can see a list of all partitions both mounted and unmounted available in the system Mark a checkbox opposite a file folder or even a whole partition to build up contents of the future backup image Check the check box next bo ny file or folder you want to back up Name Size Date a E j Defaut 7 14 2009 12 14 28 AM a E di AppData 7 13 2009 7 37 05 PM Je Application Dista 7 13 2009 9 53 55 PM 6 El Ji Cookies 7 12 2009 9 53 55 PM a F J Desktop 7 13
199. ing unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not ___ By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the General Copy and Backup Options File Backup Exclude Options Edit settings Plead General options EE Exclude from file backup archives Backup image optog Parifioning options Copy and backup options Specify masks for fies and folders that must be excluded from archives CO DWD recording options A GpNSrns Executable amp installations E ftes Run during backup options Emal opbons Operation dependency options Virtual mode options Pile system conversion options Copy Backup exclude options Fle Backup exclude options Fle Backup include options Log fies options ij Delta filter Wipe options Cielara Fitar Pialaia Bar Eonia Avc liary files 13 Sten ataron Dala rahan In this section you can find a lot of ready made exclude filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup images Please note by selecting certain filters you specify what data will be ignored during file based backup operations thus you specify the data you d like not to be added to the resulted archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filter by clicking the Add category button fa You can use widcands 7 and as file name mask VWildcands in path are not alowed o mea a In the opened dialog the program allows the
200. ion in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation Perform incremental copy Mark the checkbox to only copy changes on the hard disk from the moment of the last copy operation The program will perform comparison between a previous copy of the hard disk and its current state Only sectors that are different will be updated thus considerably decreasing the amount of data to write Skip OS auxiliary files Mark the checkbox to skip OS auxiliary files like pagefile sys hiberfil sys etc thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image Skip archive files stored in archive library Mark the checkbox to skip backup images registered in the archive database thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Copy Backup Exclude Options CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 55 CD DVD Recording Options Oy Edit settings A re pa Ha LOD and DACP OFC CO 0VD recording options et oe E lp sl A LE DERIO Gas ona Th as ls pri ol ee n mpn Run during backup options Emal gom m a FAA j Ad tI N Operation dependency ogiari Wrtual mode opbora CD DVD recording options Bum every CD DVD dak to the and Choo
201. ions This operation can be accomplished either with the Express Resize Partitions Wizard or the Redistribute Free Space Wizard Express Resize Partitions Wizard The Express Resize Partitions Wizard enables to easily increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition of your hard disk Startup There are several ways to start the Express Resize Partitions Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Partitioning button and then select Resize Partitions Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Express Resize Partitions e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Express Resize item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Adjacent partitions to resize Click on the left partition of the pair of partitions you need to redistribute the unused space between as the right one will be selected automatically The worard wi rence space between Local Disk C and data 22 0 Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Select lef partition from a par of adacent pattone you would ike to resize Fight adjacent partion wil be selected automaticaly Basic Hard Disk 0 Viware VMware Vidual 5 SCSI Disk Dev e Resulted size of partitions Redistribute the unused space between the partitions with the slider or manually by entering the required value Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 102 Flema specty new p
202. iously prepared backup image into a CD DVD drive the BIOS must be enabled to boot the system from the CD DVD device This scenario implies that you have got a bootable archive on your CD DVD In case the backup image is stored on several CD DVD disks please insert the first one 2 Restart the computer 3 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 177 d Safe Hode SL Low Graphics Safe Mode a Floppy disk amp Hard disk A MBR amp Find OSes on your hard disks By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 4 Inthe PTS DOS launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard in Linux as well Mm A Provides Restore for hard disks partitions All z Paragon Hard Disk Manager drives including NTFS are already mounted as c di e eir ii is possible to eject your t Simple Restore Wizard CUROM Ely One Button Copy Wizard CH Siart the command line ke
203. is completed you receive an image of the selected partition This image is placed into the specified destination its features defined by the dialog Available operation scenarios e Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule e Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD e Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive e Backing up a hard disk or partition to an FTP server e Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive e Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition e Creating a differential to a full partition backup e Creating an increment to a full partition backup e Creating an increment to a full file backup e Backing up with Smart Backup Wizard e Creating acyclic partition backup CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 79 e Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials Restoring System and Data The program includes a convenient and reliable restore wizard With its help you can restore all types of backup images created with the program It provides easy to understand instructions to configure and perform all the necessary settings Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup There are several ways to start the Restore Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Backup and Recovery butto
204. isk E 2 g Unalloc E eee EE 1 ac 2268 re me E E Hi pe f i gt CAS Pi AE Copy data and resize partitions proportionally in this moda ihe Wizard changes the size of partitions in the same proportion wih Keeping intact their relative onder his option can be ueehul in resting an image of hard disk lo a larger one Perfoem suface test Sel the opbon you want the Wizard to peform the surface test on the target hard dak in the casa F the program finds bad and unreliable sectors t will mark them as unusable ones All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Result The wizard will restore the archived data and make it available to use in the operating system To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios e Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule e Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD e Restoring a system partition from a network drive e Restoring a system partition from a local drive e Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 83 e Restoring a file increment e Restoring a file increment to a partition backup e Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk e Burning of data from the corrupted system disk
205. it is hardly to find a person who will be particularly happy when all precious information on the hard disk is irreversible lost as a result of its malfunction So how this tragedy can be prevented File Backup versus Sector Backup Since the advent of the computer age people were in the search of ways to guarantee data safety As a result we ve got now two principal approaches the file based backup and the sector based backup The main difference between the two lies in the way data is treated CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 28 A sector based backup operates with an image or a snapshot of the whole disk system or its separate partitions It not only includes the contents of all user made files but additionally contains the exact structure of directories information about file allocation file attributes and other related data Thus it enables to successfully process system or encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain In contrast a file based backup takes into account a file system structure and only functions on a file or folder level So it is very efficient when archiving separate files or folders but in no way will help you back up a system partition You should understand pretty well that each of the two approaches is only good when properly chosen In the comparison table below you can see when this or that approach will suit you at most Sector
206. iterations disk partition properties analysis errors management etc Auxiliary Facilities e File Transfer Wizard to make such operations as transferring of files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible Providing access to Paragon backups as regular folders it may also help to replace corrupted data from a previously created image in case of an operating system failure e Volume Explorer is a handy tool when you have different file systems on the disk whether they contain an operating system or just data Volume Explorer will let you explore a file system of any type and provide access to the necessary files and directories regardless of their security attributes e Recovery Media Builder to create a bootable recovery media based on Linux DOS or WinPE 2 1 on a CD DVD disc or flash memory which can later be used to boot and recover your computer in case of an operating system failure Moreover with its help you can save data from partitions of your hard disk directly to compact discs or burn ISO images The utility supports various formats of laser discs CD R RW DVD R RW DVD R RW DVD R DVD R double layer Blu ray and can handle multi session burning e Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection under Linux or WinPE either to save a backup of a partition hard disk or just several files on a network computer or retrieve a previously made backup from a network computer for recovery purpo
207. ive comment Hamal compressor Estenaied archive mrze 30 9 MB Archive destria ion C j Space avalable on backup destination 491 3 GB Password protection e Archive Name The program automatically offers an easy to understand name containing the date and the time of the archive creation which can anyway be modified e Archive Description You can add some additional description to the archive that will later help to distinguish it from the others e Compression Level From the pull down list you can select the desired compression level for the backup image including the No compression variant e Archive Destination Here you can manually enter a path where to place the future backup image to or press the Browse button to find the required location e Password Protection By setting a password you can protect contents of the archive against unauthorized access In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page so you will be able to define image options J Enable hol processing Merasoft Volume Shadow Copy Sernce Spi image up to 2000 MB 4 Set image fle names automaticaly Partition raw processing J Skip OS sucdlary fies J Skip archive fies stored in archive library gt toreo ae Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All righ
208. ivon Status System mor Type 1 Disk0 Partition S B WINDOWS WinXP For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation lo perform O Correct drive leners in the System Registry 2 Edit the Boot ini file O Correct the partition boot record Adjust OS to booton mew hardware T continue chick Next 6 Examine the file maybe that s where the problem is If it contains a mistake correct it by using the appropriate buttons Edit the Boot ini file on Hard Disk 0 Partition 0 boot loader timeout 10 deflauh multi Oisk Obrdisk Oipartition WINDOWS foperating systems miulti OMdisk Olrdisk O p anition 1NWINDOWS Paragon VMWare Windows XP Partition 01 fasidetect 1 Copy Add the sample 7 Ifthe Boot ini file does not contain any mistake please return to the Correct Windows Installations page to correct drive letters in the Windows System Registry Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 172 Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installations on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status S refers to 4 system partition you can edit the Boot ini fiel B a boot partition you can correct the System Registry N Pannon Staus Systemroot Type 1 Disk 0 Partition 0 SBE WINDOWS WinXP For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation to perform 2
209. k of the mouse button then select the menu item Create Partition Express Create Partition Wizard Setup Thanks to a highly intelligent work algorithm the wizard requires minimal involvement in the operation thus you only need to choose a method you find the most suitable to create the partition if several available which actually differ in the amount of space to allocate For easy perception you can see the resulted disk layout on the disk map by selecting this or that mode The result you wil yal eer eponsng the changes Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev ii td Local Disk C i a data 2 a a New V r ann 242858 NTF MN 102 5GE NT EE 1035 GENT Please select the method of new partition Creation Smat Mode Use 1821 GB io create a partition More info o Advanced Mode Use 1135 0E to create a pation More mig The number of available methods depends on your disk layout al To learn more on the way the wizard works please click the corresponding link on the first page of the wizard Create Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition destination Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then choose position for the future partition on the disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved
210. l 5 SCSI Disk Dev i 4 Unallocated Your hard disk after the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware WHMware Virtual 5 SOS Msk Dev Mer volume outari se ls S65 2 GB ib in Ln Le bea fil 55 ka Fai Mari Volume Size U Bytes lal Max Voium a If a partition to resize is locked and cannot be processed the wizard makes the system reboot to create the partition and then automatically boots the system again The rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows You can also choose whether the future partition will be primary or logical by marking the appropriate checkbox e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set a number of additional parameters Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 93 Your hard dsk sfer the changes Partition hy Volume labe New Youma Aasion the folowing deve letter E e Partition type From the pull down list select a file system the newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that it will not be ready to use Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata Dialog Setup Initi
211. l messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Virindoves May Mecha Files Back up your photos videos music and other media fies located in the My Documents folder Documents Back up documents of al major office formats located in the My Documents folder Selsci files and folders to back up Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions E mail to create a file based backup of e mail databases accounts and address books of MS Outlook MS Express and Windows Mail Media Files to create a file based backup of all media files photo video music etc stored in the My Documents folder Documents to create a file based backup of all office documents stored in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders to create a file based backup of any files and folders Depending on your choice you ll either need to specify more exactly the object of operation and then choose location for the resulted backup relevant for Disk or Partitions or Other Files and Folders or just choose location for the resulted backup for all the others To know more on how to specify the object of operation for sector and file backups as well as location for the resulted backup file please consult the other backup scenarios 5 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a hor comment to describe the archive Wa ig commert Choos
212. l only be available for the current Windows session Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Edit the archive name if necessary Please specty the archive name Archive name wil be used as a sublolder where backup daia Mes will be sared Archive delads Archive name arc 03050907 1001085 Estimated archive size 4 4 GB Spent avalsble on backup destination 38 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another network drive needs to be selected 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents A Pease enter a hor comment to describe the archive id Na Nig comment Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environments Backing up a hard disk or partition to an FTP server To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image to an FTP server please do the following Launcher Click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways describ
213. l panition to USB or Fire Ware external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you wani to save the archive to O Burn data to CD DVD Choose this option if you want the Wizard to burn the data to CO or DVD You will be prompted to choose a CD or DVD RW drive 9 On the Select Destination Path page select your system disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Select path 5 IntServicePackUninstall 5 AppPaich G Config O Connection Wizard Cursors Debug D Downloaded Program Files G Driver Cache ii EHome 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress EI in TTT Time elapsed 00 00 04 Time to finish 00 00 00 Copied so far 0 9 Mb Overall progress Transtering AWINDOWS system to mnitdiskhdal WINDOWS system tiem lof 1 Alloperations have been finished 12 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 13 Turn off the computer Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 204 A N This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Restoring sep
214. l rights reserved 208 Launcher 1 Click the Disk View tab and then choose Volume Explorer 2 E 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dew 500 GB 2 51 Primary NTFS C 499 9 GB Do E 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Devi 10GB i a E 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Devi 20GB HG Primary NTFS 53 41568 0 2 Backup Capsule 38GB 41 E 4 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Devi GPT Disk D E Virtual Drives 2 Browse for the required archive and then open it by double click of the left mouse button Size E 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Devi 80GB A GP 1 Primary NTFS G 419GB HE oc dsk D E ac dwe E E arc_images 5 SS arc_system o arc_system 001 18GB 5s CERA ce Partition 499 9GB erc_system pem 156 Bytes anc system pim 66 3 KB i gt System Volume Information 0 P2 Backup Capsule 38GB 3 E 4 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Devi GPT Disk 3 Call the popup menu right click of the mouse button for a file folder you need and then select the Export item A j f 92 2009 4 25 00 AM 4 2 2009 4 05 42 AM 9142009 6 45 37 AM 4 2 2009 1 41 04 AM 9 2 2009 1 41 04 AM 52 2009 1 37 32 AM 922009 1 41 03 AM 9 2 2009 1 41 04 AM 92 2009 4 47 55 AM 4 Select a place on the disk where the file folder will be extracted to CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 209 Look in E Local Disk C le ER
215. ld you like to do The operstion Move partition needs exclusive scoess to the volume C and cannol be completed without system eaat Ahe restart the operation wi continue in boottime mode Do not tum off the computer until the operation Ge Restart the computer Please confim restart of your computer The operabon will be conbnued ater EP Retry Maras cose used files and retry the operation Cewe Tha opermion cannot be completed without metart because soma fias are in use and prevenirla pocess to he volume Mi ija k 1 Ml J 5 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 211 suboperation progress Seraracon Paracon OFT AA i SOFTWARE GROUP Hove partition Work tinme00 01 53 Time to finishOo 02 48 Done 0 2 MB Read 9399 MB 1 0 MB s All O MBE Hrite 0 0 ME O MB s Overall progress DI Part Ed 1 Pa n e la E ii cel oe im a ta EE a de 1 tt de A AA des at a ad EN CE Getting partitions info Flushing system buffers please wait Flushing sustes buffers please wait Restart enabled Modifying drive t on hard disk Checking parameters Checking files and directories To avoid data loss please do not reset or turn off the computer Operation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation After comp
216. lect one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations Wipe Wizard Express Resee Wizard File Transfer Wirard y Boot Corrector J Network Configurator 10 Log Saver E Eject CD DVD AN Siar the command line 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 202 5 Select a disk where the system backup is stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page G DIFF1285551847 10000000 ver arc_280508134527531 P6F 3 arc_ 80508134627531 pim 6 Double click on the required backup to open Source y Documents and Settings E Program Files Ey RECYCLER G System Volume Information i NTDETECT COM ler boot ini E mid 7 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard O provisioning O pss repair G security G system E twain_32 i 0 log E 001947_1mp Total data size 904 Kb Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 8 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 203 Please select how would you like lo save the data Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want io save your data to local mounted or Physik a
217. leting the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see the newly created NTFS partition Now you ve got a place to keep your stuff apart from Windows Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent partition Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But an adjacent partition has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from an adjacent partition please do the following Express Launcher 1 Click the Partitioning button and then select Resize Partitions 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Click on your system partition By doing that the wizard will automatically select an adjacent partition as well This partition will later act as a space donor The wizard wil resize space between Local Disk C end New Volume E or Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dew Select left partition from a pair of adiacent partitions you would like to resize Fight adiacart partion wil be selected automaticaly Baws Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev ii E eae If you ve got more than two partitions on your hard disk and a partition you
218. licate partitions to protect oneself from downtime in case of a system malfunction or for cloning sample partitions The program enables to duplicate all partition data including files the exact structure of directories and file system metadata location of files security information access quotas etc The Copy Partition Wizard will help you copy a partition of any file system To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup There are several ways to start the Copy Partition Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Copying and Migration button and then select Copy Partition Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Copy Partition e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Copy Partition item of the Wizards menu e Inthe Toolbar click the Copy Partition button Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy partition operation o The partition to copy Select a partition you want to copy On this page you can choose a volume to copy Hasic Hard Ask U VMware Vieware Virtual S Stool Disk Lary ij t Local Disk C 499 9 GB NTFS Basic Hard Lsk 1 VMwore Viwanr Virtual S SCSI Disk Lev t Local Disk E g Local Dis i a E a Unallo Ml 3 4G8 FAT32 BB 24GBNTFS 14G 226
219. ling with different operating systems or different versions of one and the same OS as they will be unaware of each other e Boot menu options In this section you can switch between the following modes Normal mode Choose this mode to display the boot menu every time the computer starts up and define a timeout on the expiry of which the program will automatically select the previously chosen item of the menu Hidden mode Choose this mode not to display the boot menu until pressing a hot key For this mode you should define a hot key used to enable the Boot Manager and a time period in seconds the startup message will be displayed Boot menu options Hidden mode Time to display the Boot Manager statup mesage Choose a hot ey for startup Boot Manager e Deactivating Configuring the Boot Manager These two options will only be available once the wizard has been completed and launched again Select the Deactivate option to remove the Boot Manager from the MBR Master Boot Record or Configure to modify the previously set parameters of the startup process Configure Choose this option to enter Settings page You wii be abia to configure Boot Manager appearances and Boot Menu options Deactivate y AP i pe ee ee a pak E a Ls dm Choose this option to deactivate BootManager This wil remove BootManager and resore boot procesa to As prenous state Result After the Boot Manager Setup Wizard is completed the program updates the
220. link in the left lower corner of the page The Shutdown System on Complete option enables to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the operation Managing Tasks All scheduled tasks are placed in a separate list which can be retrieved by clicking the Scheduled Tasks tab in the Explorer Bar Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 123 Disk View Scheduled Tasks Archives Help Scheduled Tasks f Ik Hame Sonig Vien to Run Backup of MBR of hard disk scr 020909124744490ps At 12 00 00 AM every Mon of every week starting 9 2 2008 On every task you can get in depth information including e The task name e The full path to the generated script of the task e Scheduled time of launch e Statistics on the last launch e Scheduled time of the next launch e Used account information e Comments to the task To easily manage tasks the program enables to arrange them according to a certain characteristic just by clicking on the required property This feature can be particularly beneficial when the Scheduled Tasks list contains too many items You can also enable disable rename delete refresh or modify properties of the selected task Task Editor With the Task Editor you can easily modify properties of scheduled tasks To do that you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a task on the Scheduled Tasks list 2 Call the Task Editor dialog There are seve
221. lity of browsing and editing scheduled operations and the program scripts e Archives which enables to manage the Archive Database e Help which contains the program help and general information on the product You can access the desired information by clicking on the appropriate tab The Explorer Bar is a fully functional embedded HTML browser which offers the possibility to address for example the company s website to look through important technical notes or download the latest updates without having to close the program The program help is also HTML oriented You can read it and follow external links from to get additional information TI Gparagor Paragon Ha Harg DISK LET Teki E SOFTWARE GROU J Version information Paragon Hard Disk Manager version 2010 build 9307 29 12 09 Server Components versions Paragon Base Services Library versi n 1 1 build 307 29 12 09 hdm dil version 10 0 release 10 build 10707 biont dil version 10 0 release 10 build 10707 bont sys version 10 0 relasse 10 build 10707 Support links Company Home Page h Sales E mail sales ipe i tware com Sales Phone TAD 0 76 1 59 018 201 To easily navigate through browsed pages the program provides the following functionality BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY Return to the previously browsed page e Open the next browsed page Stop loading the current page CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved
222. lters you specify what data will be processed during file based backup operations thus you automatically ignore files that do not match so they won t be added to the resulted archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filter by clicking the Add category button Hame Alter fou can use wildcards 7 and as file name mask Vildcands Ww in path are not abowed os conos _ In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 66 e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not Log Files Options Dy Edit settings o i General options L a he j Dickin boga ato Log files options Partition ng GENHS Copy and backup options Choose a storage fe span for the stubact log file Fiesse note once the defined pes od am an has been amred the file wil be emplied Pam m pii pe e 5m a uris a lee Bii ap mm UF Plot procesano options o hinia iy HL at FT Mi Ara la la LS
223. may also be asked bo restart you computer dunng Ihis operation E Create a copy of the partition A new partbon vil be created and all the data val be copied there TOU Can creaba an exact copy or copy only the area that is occupied by data When you select a small sized bar i e corresponding to a logical disk the Explorer Bar will display information on it as well The page title will contain a drive letter which is assigned to the disk The disk layout graph will be colored in accordance with the volume ratio of the used space to the free space the light colored sector The table on the right will contain the following information Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 69 e Volume label if available e Type of the logical disk e File system represented by the color of the graph and the selected bar e Total size used space and free space in GB or MB Below there is a list of wizards which may be called for this disk All default values of parameters will correspond to the disk settings Viewing Image Properties General information on backup archives can be obtained either with the help of the Restore Wizard or the Archive Database Using the Restore Wizard There are several ways to launch the Restore Wizard e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Restore e In Common Tasks bar click the Restore item of the Wizards menu e Select a hard disk partition and then click the Restore an image of
224. mmand line e Hard Disk Manager enables to copy and back up separate partitions or entire hard disks carry out partitioning operations etc e Simple Restore Wizard allows restoring hard disks and partitions e One Button Copy Wizard helps to carry out such a technically complicated operation as cloning of hard disks just by pressing one button e Wipe Wizard enables to destroy all on disk information or only remnants of deleted files directories e Express Resize Wizard enables to increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition e File Transfer Wizard allows coping files folders to another disk or a partition as well as recording them to CD DVD e Boot Corrector helps to correct the Windows System Registry without Windows being loaded e Network Configurator enables to establish a network connection under Linux CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 25 If you are going to use network resources first launch the Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection e Log Saver helps to collect and send the necessary log files to the Technical Support e View the mounted partitions the list of all mounted partitions will be displayed The Linux DOS recovery environment assigns drive letters to partitions the way it is done in DOS i e one after another primary partitions at first Thus mounted partitions may have different driv
225. most Besides an advanced system of filters will help you automate the process of building up contents of the future backup image e Incremental backup to a file image to only archive changes since the last full or incremental file based image An incremental image is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its incrementals to restore the latest point of this kind of backup e File backup to a sector image It is a unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backup and the disk imaging backup With its help you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get it back on track in minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is critical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources e Cyclic backup to automate the backup of separate partitions It is an ideal option if you want to establish a self acting data protection system A N Cyclic Backup is only available for the Windows installation of the program l e Synthetic backup to change any property merge a given differential image with its full image split un split compress de compress etc of an existing backup image without carrying out a physical backup operation e Bootable Backup Capsule
226. mount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the new partition Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map The virtual operations are to be available File system for new partition From the pull down list select a file system the newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that it will not be ready to use Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become available J Use 05 bull in formal routine Please select number of sectors per cluster f Presse select number of sector per bool Please select number of root entries Restore del gulls Use OS built in routine Mark the option to restrict the available values according to the used OS Whether the surface test will be performed Define the level of the surface check to make the program f
227. mulate the C H S geometry Hidden Partition The concept of a hidden partition was introduced in the IBM OS 2 Boot Manager By default an operating system does not mount a hidden partition thus preventing access to its contents A method of hiding a partition consists in changing the partition ID value saved in the Partition Table This is achieved by XOR ing the partition ID with a 0x10 hexadecimal value Master File Table MFT is a relational database that consists of rows of file records and columns of file attributes It contains at least one entry for every file on an NTFS volume including the MFT itself MFT is similar to a FAT table in a FAT file system MBR 1st track of the hard disk is the Oth sector of the disk MBR Master Boot Record contains important information about the disk layout The used partitioning scheme The starting records of the Partition Table The standard bootstrap code or the initial code of boot managers disk overlay software or boot viruses Generally the Oth sector is used for similar purposes in all existing partitioning schemes Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 245 The MBR capacity is not sufficient to contain sophisticated boot programs That s why the on boot software is allowed to use the entire Oth track of the disk For example boot managing utilities such as LILO GRUB and Paragon Boot Manager are located in the Oth track Partition ID or
228. n Attributes This chapter explains how you can change partition attributes Active flag Hidden flag Partition ID Volume Label etc Mark Partition Active Inactive The program enables to set an active inactive flag for primary partitions of a hard disk By default an operating system will boot only if its partition is active or bootable In order to mark a partition active inactive you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a primary partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Mark Partition Active Inactive Dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Mark Partition as Active Inactive Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Mark Partition as Active Inactive Es Are you sure you want to set the volume as active You are about to set the volume F No label NTFS as active F you already 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation There can only be one active partition on a hard disk otherwise your operating system will YN fail to boot Hide Unhide Partition The program allows you to hide unhide primary and logical partitions By default an operating system does not mount hidden partitions thus preventing access to their contents In order to hide unhide a partition you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the
229. n Software Group All rights reserved 53 Partitioning Options Edit settings Ee Genes ont ons oe Ss Partitioning Options Enable 64 KE clusters tor FAT 16 r r a r s i ra IF CD DVD recording options Choose this option io enable 64 KB clusters for FAT 16 partitions Wah this setin x La i T k at Pet a J Hol processang options you will be able to create FAT16 partitions wih capacity up lo 4 GB Pisasa noti i TN pan i ail j Es i A n ia a Aun during bankus opina that only Windows NT famiy systems wil be able to accass such partitions ion duina backup opis Emal opbors Confirmations Operation dependency options a ney ae r J Ask for volume label before partition delete ort A AA See ee T what li a ee Se all i i y r pa ml bs File system conversion options Ask confirmation when convering FATIE te FATIZ a E Elabora Ce Core ey A ae ape econ yo Backup eccude coors Fia Barkus relusda solana rary E Teele ieee a t nr A E ta mt b am This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during partitioning operations e Enable 64 KB cluster size for FAT16 Mark the checkbox to enable 64KB clusters for FAT16 partitions Thus you will be able to create FAT16 partitions up to 4GB in size Due to the maximum cluster size of 32KB for Windows 95 98 ME or MS DOS FAT16 partitions larger than 2GB are not reliably accessible under these operating systems e Request confirmation before
230. n and then select Restore Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Restore e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Restore item of the Wizards menu e Inthe Toolbar click the Restore Wizard button Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the restore operation e A backup image to be restored The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any E Show all de En Typa Creation Date Source Object Sie i j 9 2 2009 506400 AM Heere Archive 4 KE E 9 2 2009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk C 499 9 GB FF 9 2 2009 22101 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMhware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev 1068 y ich io File View Archive Fle Details Comment My documents Backup date 92 2009 5 06 03 AM Total sizes 4 KB 4 096 Bytes Archive size 445 Bytes Ha Gare doc FLOKO archive pti Base archive To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All
231. n data to CD DVD Choose this option if you want the Wizard to burn the data to CD or DVD You will be prompted to choose a CD or DVD RW drive 9 On the Select Destination Path page select a hard disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Select path Space available on destination 8 6Gb Total data size n a 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 198 Operations list Suboperallon progress AA ATT Operation progress Time elapsed 00 00 03 Time w finish 00 00 00 Copied solar 17 0 Mb Overall progress Transtering mntydisk hda1 Documents and Settings User E Mail Database to mntdisk hda2 E Mail Data Transtering mntdisk hd al Documents and Settings User My Documents do mntdisk hda2 My Document All operations have been finished 12 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 13 Turn off the computer This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD To retrieve valuable information fr
232. n list of available CD DVD devices the required drive to use during the operation Drive Optiarc OVD RW AD 7170A Bed the disc after check e Set whether to eject the disk after the operation is completed or not Result After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 137 Edit View Sectors With the built in Edit View Sectors tool the program enables to view edit sectors on existing partitions hard disks providing the possibility to directly access and modify sectors save and restore sectors from specified files navigate through the system metadata etc In order to edit view sectors of a hard disk partition you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a hard disk partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Edit View Sectors dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Click the Disk View tab and then choose Disk Editor Select in the Main Menu Partition Hard Disk gt Edit View Sectors Call the popup menu for the selected partition hard disk right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Edit View Sectors Edit sectors on Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Current sector ia Oof 1 048 575 999 Please select sector number 0 AS 5e ee 0x0000000000 00000000010 OxO0000000020 00000000030 00000000040 Ox0000000050 OxXO0000000060 00000000070 00000000060
233. n on to make senpt interpreter to check the resul of each operation Cescard all operations on close Tum this option on to discard al the pending operations after generating the scrip Interaction with the user Mark the option to pause the script interpreter during the execution to prompt the user s confirmation or other input Otherwise the program will not stop using default values for parameters if needed e Commit after each operation Mark the option to commit changes after each operation Check for errors after each operation Mark the option to insert a special code in script which checks the status of the last executed operation and stops the script processing if there are errors of any kind e Discard all operations on close Mark the option to empty the List of Pending Operations after generating the Script Result After the operation is completed you receive a new script file It is placed into the specified destination its features defined in the dialog This command is unavailable if there are no operations on the List of Pending Operations To learn more about scripts please consult the Paragon Scripting Language manual Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 127 Extra Functionality This chapter describes the supplementary functionality available in the program View Partition Hard Disk Properties The program enables to obtain in depth information on the properties of hard disks
234. nd leia mislin parillone will be processad as well This can help to avoid probleme with hidden data created by certain appbcaliona of the stem administrator However will take more time to accomplish the operation Copy options HDD raw copy to copy the hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Partition raw copy to copy the on disk partitions in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation Perform incremental copy to only copy changes on the hard disk from the moment of the last copy operation The program will perform comparison between a previous copy of the hard disk and its current state Only sectors that are different will be updated thus considerably decreasing the amount of data to write Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 85 Change masks for files to exclude from copy to manage contents of the resulted duplicate By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog If you need to chang
235. need to JN increase is surrounded by other partitions you ve got the choice to choose which partition will act as a space donor Just click on the left partition of the pair as the right one will be CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 212 selected automatically 4 Increase size of the system partition with the slider or manually by entering the required value Please note when you change size of one partition the size of the other will be changed as well thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions Pigsse soecty new anes of selected partansa Selected part of Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Lah volume are Right volume re 0624 ME 2 MB 471368 MB l MB 5 On the next page of the wizard you need to confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option The Wizard has not applied your changes yet On this page you can edher accept or reconsider the changes Please note that f you accent the changes the Wizard wil physically plom af the neccessary operations and t will not be possible to undo the changes i may take some time to apoly tha changes You may also be asked to restart your computer during this process Would you ike to apply your changes Yes apoly the changes physically No let me reconsider 6 That s basically it By clicking the Next button the wizard will start modifying your disk layout If you ve got to do
236. nformation on Disks and Backup IMageS sessesessesessececsscecescecesoecescecesoecesoscecsecesesceseececseoesesseseeseo 67 Viewing Disk PKODErES ad 67 VIEWING Image Propertesarna dni AAA A AA 69 Data Backup ana Rescue 73 Creating Backup Moges a ira 73 Restorine SY SCCM MANO Data di a 79 COPY TASAS iio ici 83 Conine Hard DISKS iii A Ad 83 BOOU Manate menta aiii a 88 Partition Manasementisa nica aa DNA AAA ld 90 Basic Partitioning OPeratiONS pai AAA A o 90 Advanced Partitioning Operations isciairia o a ica o oe 99 Chane lis Partition Atti UECS ear icciadoainido iaa N caco ocio n 112 Hard Disk Management iia id 115 Upadatine MBR os 115 Converting Dynamic MBR tO Das aan AAA 115 converting GPTto Basic MBR taria abs 116 Chane Se Filial ao e a A A 117 Wipe PASS acicate 118 Task SENEeQuUiINS iii 121 O 122 Managing TASKS a A AS A A A A A etait ie wn toad at ck ce 122 creatine a Scheduled TaS sali idilio 124 SCID UNE sora R E A N 125 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved EX ta FUncUON a Ii 127 View Partitions Hard DISK Propertie sia dc 127 Volume EXD Terapia Di ic 127 File Transter Wizard AA 128 Ms A dusdecesmactucusesee season eeadaenetatene 130 Downgrade NTFS Ver a 131 NULO LE gin Ade a Sarees sank 5 RO 132 Test SUMA AA Aia 133 Checa File SV SCSI ICS sra A oa 134 Check Archive IIS dba 134 CREE RECO VOT DI CS raid os rica aio ic 136 EI VICW SCCLOUS aa OA e 137 No A tie casateeeiessaee 138 View O
237. ng partitions and blocks of free space for bad or unstable sectors If found any it automatically marks them unusable in the file system metadata thus minimizing the risk of data loss In order to start the surface test you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition or a block of free space on the Disk Map 2 Call the Test Surface dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Test Surface Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Test Surface 3 From the pull down list choose the level of the surface check Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 134 Es Sam Test surface of volume C Testing volume sutace allows to find bad blocks and other problems Please select 6 surface tes level 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check File System Integrity The program allows you to check integrity of a file system It can be used to detect possible file system errors before performing any operation on a partition To start the system integrity check you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Check File System Integrity dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Partition gt Check File System In
238. nt when all changes are applied and everything is ready to install the second OS please do the following to make your system bootable once again only relevant for the traditional scenario 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe Linux launch menu select Hard Disk Manager You can create delet and format hard disk partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the yan please select the drive and one of its partitions or its free space Then activate the Panition pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Paragon Hard Disk Manager Simple Restore Wizard One Button Copy Wizard Wipe Wizard Express Rese Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector 7 Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD Start the command line 3 Inthe main window select your non bootable Windows partition on the Disk Map CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 231 Basic Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive 250 Gb fa NTFS Vista 3 i Basic Disk Model VMware Viral IDE Hard Drive Size 250 Gb N Volume Type File System Sire Used Free Volume l
239. oa Disk C GS Acolcations EJ Change Volume Label t 5 Exended Partition ia ae Letter G2 F Hide Partition EP TEMP IG Make Partition Primary gt Basic dicen Viewers VMware Vrival 5 SCS Disk Day Change Cluster Size Bi ee a canes Change Serial Number SS Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 S051 Dik ie 3 aes Change Partition ID ge Local Disk 7 E Lalocated Wipe Partition Clear Free Space Test Surface i E Check File System Integrity Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Edit View Sectors MN A im ma Properties i A Data F TEMP csi 10 l A bl i CHI 1 bad aes IL isoocerarzz a hile syal A 3 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the partition to the right by the drag and drop technique While doing this free space from the partition will be released displayed in aqua green You can also do it manually by entering the exact size of free space Click the Yes button to continue ie Are you sure you want to mowe resize volume G You are about lo moverse FATS2 volume TEMP G Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev E o Unallocated Saa 3 5158 no o Volume sre 103 167 33 ME j 36 MB 164 156 MB Free space before 60 902 55 MB gt O bytes 164 070 03 MB Free space after 0 Bytes Dbyies 164 070 09 MB Select his option lo
240. ocal Disk 7 Primary P Local Disk 7 Primary E Fl F Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Devi internal Hard Disk Dris 7 oly The sre of obsects to back up 499 9 GB Estimated archive size 7 2 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 4 Onthe Backup Destination page select the Save data to local network drives option There sre several ways the Wizard can store your dats Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to the Backup Capsule Save data to local network dives Save data to physical partitions Save data to FTP locations Bum the data to CD or DVD 5 Map a network disk to place your backup image to Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Select a folder where archive should be placed and speciy archive name Archive name wil be used 55 3 sub4older where backup data files wil be stoned Archive location Care 030309071551273 Xx 2 Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Definea letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 6 A 146 Mark the checkbox to make this connection permanent Otherwise it wil
241. ocuments as no redundant data is processed But if you care about maintaining a files history you can benefit from one more supplementary technique called Incremental File Backup An incremental archive only contains data changed since the time of creating a full or incremental file based archive It is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its increments to restore the latest point of this kind of backup Incremental Chain to a File Backup sunday Monday Tuesday saturday Base File increment Increment 2 Increment n Backup a a a Monday restore point 4 Tuesday restore point Saturday restore point Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 30 File Increment to a Sector Backup File Increment to a Sector Backup is a unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backup and the sector based backup With its help you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get it back on track in minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is critical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources Backup Storage Our program supports all present day techniques of storing backup images L
242. olume Cw E A Please speedy drive lester el space Ta GB 6 Define parameters of the future partition By all means it has to be primary and since we are going to install Windows XP the most preferable file systems are NTFS and FAT32 Click the Yes button to continue Create nea partition Bs Primary partition Please speciy new parttion sir 349451 E TMB 345 451 MB Please specfy size of free space before the partition U OMB 345 437 MB Please specify size of free space ater tha partition 0 OMB 249 443 MB Please select file system fornew pattan NTFS Plaga arder new volume lapel haw Voima Fiesse soecty drive later F A N The Create Partition dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 7 As a result of the operation we have got a newly created FAT32 partition just enough in size to comfortably work with Windows XP Viste C New Volume F me 158 7 GB NTFS 341 2GB NTFS 8 Hide the Windows Vista partition to avoid writing any data on it during the Windows XP installation as it is the best way to provide system independence To do that please call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button and launch the Hide Partition dialog Click the Yes button to continue Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Volume letter E Serial number E
243. om archive i Time espsed 00 00 17 Time remaining 00 03 45 i Restore Primary peiton U sk 0 from file Za 230509103150968 2re _280508103150963_D0000 000 Shutdown system on completa Mark the checkbox at the bottom of the window to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the restore operation 11 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with the Linux DOS recovery environment To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from a local drive Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble after having installed brand new software But you ve got a backup of the system partition on a local disk That s just enough to easily roll it back to the point when run smoothly To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following Launcher 1 Click the Restore item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 Onthe Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Onthe Browse for Archive page specify the required archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 184 Y Sh
244. om your hard disk and burn it to CD DVD when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since it s the only mode that enables to burn CD DVD discs Normal Mode d Safe Hode SL Low Graphics Safe Mode amp Floppy disk amp Hard disk B MBR 2 Find OSes on your hard disks By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 199 y You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the Simple Restore Wizard pan please select the drive and one of its l ES partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations yr Wipe Wizard Express Resize Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector Network Configurator Lo
245. on Delete Partition Dese esting partition and al daia E contains Boot management Resize Partitions Move border of adiacert partitions of the same type both logical or both primary to redsirbute mace between them Note thes wizard covers only basic resize sceananos f rane operation can ba camed cul wih Expresa Haara Wizard please saich to Full Tools scale Launcher ght checking on a partition you would like to resize and select hove Resize Partition Merge two adacent partitions wih the same file system and the same type primary to primary or logical to logical Help Y Full Scale Launcher 8 Restan 8 Shutdown 4 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will help you make the right choice 5 Consult the help system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject i Our WinPE 2 1 based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard disks will be unavailable Please consult the Adding specific drivers scenario to know how to tackle this issue Basic Concepts This chapter explains terms and ideas that show how the program works To understand these helps to obtain a general notion of the operation performance and makes it easier for the user to operate the program System and Data Protection The data protection issue is a growing cause of worrying for more and more people today Indeed
246. on FTP 1 You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 by default 2 File backup and restore to from FTP including the selective restore functionality are not available 3 SSL login password encryption is not supported 4 Youcan browse an FTP server in the passive mode only 5 Parallel access to several FTP servers is limited only one password for all servers is available Adaptive Restore Windows family operating systems are notorious for their excessive sensibility to hardware especially when it turns to replacement of such a crucial device as HDD controller or motherboard actually Windows will most likely fail to boot as a result of this operation With our technology available in the P2P Adjust OS Wizard you can make your Windows bootable on some other computer by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for a migration of this Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 31 kind Actually this operation for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 and Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 differs a bit so does the wizard s work algorithm Adaptive Restore for Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 It actually implies three operations e Providing the ability to change the Windows kernel settings to the most suitable for your new configuration The program will automatically add all available Windows HAL and ke
247. on options Dl m ee ee m gn n ple g meu al _ L mn J E di A Lopy and backup options SA AIME rona cr I s r q a OE ig j 25 maa mo o T de a a a PA a a ela Fa VI A m r am AS Paco Ime lo 4140303 ene Pe POCERO Opuona Dh a sli J a 5 Select Lario for fl Foyer Run during backup options SA SAL POS PA eee CAMA OFT abs Pd Operation dependency options FF re ee at 3 Fer lar md y i a oa a oP roi al mr at ym ikai mode onioni This language wil be used to specify national symbols in fle names F 1 E eee E im aay feo BCE So Fae ATAS oe ia E AR DA ee Cordrm setings before NTFS lt gt FAT FATG2 convenios OY Ba CRI cos DPuona a if a Him ra A Pee Fa Aaa Ep a pi ae ir Fe se 5 AO MA on 0 Mars ME program 0 20 fo CUR ore reese res ES Ea di dae na FE i ae y ak Backup EECA OON FIA Tas Cn PERA p hens y moe q y pu mi m Fle Backup include optons O CaS OO BE i r 11502 Opera OK Carcel This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account when converting FAT and NTFS file systems By default the program takes locale regional settings from the system Problems might occur however because of different standards for file names and file time stamps Created Modified and Last Access Time of NTFS and FATxx file systems To tackle problems of that kind you can manually set e Time zone to use during the convert operation NTFS keeps file timestamps in GMT Greenwich Mean Time
248. oncnnnnncnnnnancnonacononacononacnnonanononananonocnnnanononaso 201 Restoring separate files and folders from a backup ooocccccnnccnnonnncnnnnnnonononanonnnnanonnnnononnnonanonnonononnnonnrnnnonannnnenanonononacrannnnos 204 RESIZE SCCM AM OS muii ainia cn an A E AD AR A AAA ad 209 Creating a new partition to detach operating system from the rest Of data cccooccnccnccnnnncnnonaninonannnonananonacnnonacnnnanononaso 209 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent partitiON oonccccnccccnncnnnnncnnnnarinonarinonanoso 211 Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from ANY Oth r ooccccnnccncnncononacnnonacanonanononacnnnarononaninonanoss 213 Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition oooccccccnccnnconaconnnnanonnnnanonononaronnnnanonnnnononnnnnaconnnnanonnos 217 Resizinepartitions of Apple Boot Camp ci A 220 Creating Dual BOOESYStEMS idad dana 222 FOFAVINCOWS COMPUTE smile 222 System Migration Scenarios iia iia 232 Migrating system to another hard disk Clone HDD esesssssssssseresssrrrsessrrrrssssrrrresssrrresssrrrressrreresssrtreessrteressseteeesseteresseeeeee 232 Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS ooonccnnnccnnccnnnnnonaconnnononanonnnnononocnnnnonanoconnnonanorcnnnnonanoss 234 Hard Disk Optimization E E O A 236 Hard DISK UtiliZati A TE TENENTE E ES 237 Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All r
249. opy operation target sueldo Da caa Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev S E E D 99 9 GE NTFS Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev LE g Archives G u Backup Capsule 19 GB WTFS LETE Basic Hard Disk VMware SCSI Disk Dev d During the operation all contents of the destination disk will be deleted 7 On the next page of the wizard define the copy options In our case we d rather copy data with a proportional resize to occupy the entire disk Besides we recommend you to enable the surface test to make sure your new hard disk is flawless Choose copy options that sut best your task Copy options HOD raw copy O Perfor incremental copy Resize options Mark the checkbox to proportionally change the size of partitions while keeping ther relative order intact Tip This can be very convenient when migrating to a larger hard disk 8 On the Revise Copy Results page review all parameters of the operation Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dew ll Local Disk EJ e E es 49 Unalio MBsscerars 24GBNTFS JAG Boece TE Hard Disk 3 i Me n VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dew I g Local Disk Local Ds oe E SOC Ta TIEL Ta GE FATJE m 120568 NTFS 1346 GE FAA AA 5
250. or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 3 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 196 d Safe Hode SL Low Graphics Safe Mode a Floppy disk amp Hard disk A MBR amp Find OSes on your hard disks By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 4 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon Hard Disk Manager partitions using Paragon Hard Disk Manager which will stan now Upon the sian please select the drive and one of ins partitions or its free space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of One Button Copy Wizard the partitioning operations Simple Restore Wizard Wipe Wizard Express Resize Wizard File Transfer Wizard Boot Corrector N
251. ore files to The files and fc place where they were archived from Leave e sting files Replace existing fies Besides if you select the Original location option you can additionally define whether to replace already existing files during the restore operation good for recovering presumably corrupted files or leave them intact good for recovering accidentally deleted files Sector Backup Restore A Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Please select one of the objeci s to restore Hame Type Fie system Site Used E Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Mode intemal Hard Disk Drive 1068 Local Disk 1 Primary linc Swap2 509 8 MB 4 KB H E Local Disk 7 Prmary Linwoc Ext 3 14GB 581M 3 BP New Volume F Primary NTFS 24GB 3563MB ap E ees 2 F El System Volume infom 7 E New VOLUME E Primary FAT 1468 4 KB Archive Details Name New Volume F Volume label New Volume Re system NTFS Total size 24GB Used space 356 3 MB Free space GB To select where lo restore the selected obtectis cick Meet Data size to restore 132 8 KB If you select separate files or folders to restore the wizard will continue working as though you ve got to do with a file backup A place to restore Selecting the destination please note all contents on the disk selected for rest
252. original record in the MBR to get control of the booting process and to be able to display the boot menu Available operation scenarios Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 90 e Creating Dual Boot Systems Partition Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry out partitioning operations supported by the program Basic Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish basic partitioning operations create format delete Creating Partitions The program provides the ability to create a new partition by using the DOS partitioning scheme This operation can be accomplished either with the Create Partition Wizard or the Create Partition Dialog Besides there s the Express Create Partition Wizard that will analyze your disk subsystem to help you create an NTFS partition in the most appropriate place of your hard disk by up taking all the unallocated disk space if any and or an innocuous slice of the unused space of an adjacent partition and then make it available in the system by assigning a drive letter Restrictions 1 Do not use the Create Partition function in order to undelete the last deleted partition 2 The program cannot create new partitions on Dynamic Disks The current version of the program supports only hard disks that use the DOS partitioning scheme in Windows 2000 and XP these disks are named Basic Disks 3 According to the rules of the
253. oring purposes will be deleted during the operation Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S 5051 Disk Dev g Local Disk C 499 3 GB NTFS g 3 Local Disk E E 3 4G9 FATIH Be wwe IAG Mc To help you get a clear cut picture of the operation outcome the program allows inspecting the resulted disk layout Restoring Partition Size of the restored volume and free space before and after it on the disk CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 82 Geometry Restore Options Please specify the se of the restored partition 2470 36 MB 2470 MB Please specty size of free space before the partition U OMB 2434 MB Please specfy size of free space after the partbion O OMB 434 MB e Drive letter assignment after restore The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the restored partition Partition Restore Options Assign the fofowing dive letter F Restoring Hard Disk e Copy data and resize partitions proportionally If this option is activated the program proportionally changes the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when restoring to a larger hard disk e Perform surface test Define whether the surface test will be accomplished during the operation or not Your hard disk after the changes Hase Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vidal 5 5051 Disk Dev Y i Local Disk 7 E g Local D
254. ow al amp Ed Eh Type Creation Date Source Object Size E 9 3 2009 3 57 21 AM Local Disk 7 24GB El 9 2 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev 10GB amp 9 2 2009 5 20 25 AM New Volume F 24 GB LA 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Fledevel Archive 113 1 KB FJ 9 2 2009 5 06 03 AM Fledevel Archive KE E 9 2 2009 2 21 01 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 10GB p Local Disk C My system backup No label NTFS Total size 499 968 856GB Free space 491 4 GB G arc_system arc_system PBF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image in Archives G SE Xx Name Size Date a 3 El Archives G ASES 9 2 2009 5 25 00 AM E Ji arc_doc 9 2 2009 5 05 42 AM L a Ji arc images 9 3 2009 3 57 31 AM zj di acsem o o o 22009 241 04 AM 1 Doc system PEF 1968 9 2 2009 2 37 32 AM l Local Disk C My system backup No label NTFS Total size 4995 59GB 85GB Free space 491 4GB Guse esten ae gaem PDF To know more on the subject plea
255. owadays is becoming highly popular among PC users That is due to some definite advantages it can offer First of all many people clone hard disks just to back up data for security reasons The present day copy utilities enable to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 35 service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capability In case of a system malfunction the user can get the system back on track in minutes No additional configuration is required what is very convenient The second possible application is the upgrade of a hard disk to a new one The capacity of a modern hard drive doubles every two years thus opening up new possibilities for software developers As a result programs become more complicated and require considerable amount of free space One day the user realizes that there is no more free space left on the hard disk and the only way out is to upgrade Usually that means that besides purchasing a new hard disk the user is to face a large re installation procedure spanning several days of tedious work But all of this can be avoided just by copying the contents of the old hard disk to a new one proportionally resizing the partitions And the last but not least is the copying of hard disks for cloning purposes It may be of great use when setting up similar computers There is no ne
256. ox to accept If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use the program 3 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Launch P2P Adjust OS Wizard Our WinPE 2 1 based environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard disks will be unavailable Please consult the Adding specific drivers scenario to know how to tackle this issue The Vizard has fadad to find any 05 that can be modfied Please note the Virard can oni work with Moneoft Windows 2000 and later Depending on your system configuration and hardware some diske can be una vajab a for E the program 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 235 5 From the list of all found Windows based operating systems if several select one you need to adjust to your new hardware If you re willing to adjust them all just re launch this wizard for each Os Volume Label Capacity EF vindows 200 Local Disk E Mo label 19GB E Windows XP Local Disk D No label 4 8 GB The wizard can only work with Microsoft Windows 2000 and later operating systems 6 Choose whether you re going to add drivers for the new hardware to the selected operating system or not and the way it s to be done Actually you ve got three options e Upload drivers automati
257. p All rights reserved 129 e Click the Backup and Recovery button and then select Transfer Files Launcher e Select in the Main Menu Tools gt File Transfer Wizard e Select the Transfer Files item of the Wizards menu on the Common Tasks Bar Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the transfer operation e Place to look for files directories Select a source disk from the pull down list in the left pane of the page The program enables to process both mounted and unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Besides it is possible to map a network drive F Local Disk C i g 3 N gt E DVD RW Dive 0 _ Local Disk El Local Disk F E Archives 57 New Volume H Physical partitions wa NEW VOLUME Disk 1 CI Network places EN Network e Object s of operation Choose files directories you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the Add button To delete a file directory from the Clipboard select it in the Clipboard pane and press the Remove button You can also create a new folder rename or irreversibly delete existing files directories of the left pane by pressing the appropriate buttons me Soc Pah E Local Disk F 7 ER E E images F images Name a f ELL EF E hibertil sys F 4 pagetie sys z ia T ii 5 DVD RW Drive D 3 E Local Disk E Local Disk F SB Pl images a System Volume information Total data size 132
258. p procedure At first everything seems quite OK you can see the standard startup messages on the screen but at some moment it hangs up To fix your Windows startup ability please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu A Normal Mode Main recovery d Safe Hode environment SL Low Graphics Safe Mode amp Floppy disk Hard disk B MER a Find OSes on your hard disks CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 170 By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select Boot Corrector You can find it in PTS DOS as well J You can create delete and format hard disk Paragon
259. r OVD 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Please speciy the archive name Archive name wil be used as a subfolder where backup data fies wil Archive name arc 030905071001085 Estmatad archive size 44GB Space avalable on backup destination 38 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Pease enter a hor comment to describe the mche IS Ho comment CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 156 8 Choose whether to accomplish the operation immediately set a time table for it or generate a script 9 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive a differential backup of the selected partition It is placed into the specified destination a local or network disk the Backup Capsule or a CD DVD disc its features defined by the wizard A N This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Creating an increment to a full partition backup To update only files you need since the last full partition backup please do the following Click the Create File Complement item of the Wizards menu On the Wizard s Welcome page
260. ral ways to do it Click the Properties button on the Scheduled Tasks list Call the popup menu for the selected task right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Properties Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 124 8 Task Properties Backup of MBR of hard disk 0 General Schedule 5 Program C Program Hes Paragon Software Deve Backup 10 Server Edbon program scripts e EJ Sept n Fles Paragon Sofware Dive Backup 10 Server Editionu seripts scr_012090914744450 pal Edi Backup has been scheduled 922009 54744 AM 3 Inthe opened dialog window you can see two tabs General and Schedule Click the General tab to modify e Full path to the macro command program interpreter which describes the scheduled task e Command line for starting the interpreter i e the task described in macro language e Comments referring to the task e The option of enabling disabling the task By clicking the Schedule tab you can modify the task timetable In order to apply the changes you need to click the Apply button at the foot of the dialog Creating a Scheduled Task You can set a timetable for execution of any operation For backup and copy operations the program offers handy wizards while all the others can be scheduled with the Save to Scheduler dialog To create a scheduled task you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Make sure the virtual mode of execution is enabled 2 Car
261. re Group All rights reserved 105 To know more on the available search methods please use the context sensitive hint IN system e File system filter By default the wizard will search for all known file systems However by clicking on the appropriate option on the second page of the wizard you can specify only those file systems you need amp Hide file systems search options Al known file systems FAT and FATI2 fle systems 41 NTFS fle system Uni Ext and Exd 3 file systema 05 2 HPFS fie system Other junisted file sytem To begin search cick Next e A partition to undelete if several By default the program searches records of any deleted partition ever existed on the selected block of free space So you can get several partitions to choose from f Search deleted parbiionis from sector 40 lo sector AH The following partitions have been found Fle system Type Capacity Used Space Usad T MTFS a 199GB 85 3 MB Stoo search Most likely the required partition will be found first If so you may abort the search operation by pressing the Stop search button Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition Installing a New Operating System Getting your computer ready to install a new operating system especially when it is going to be an additional OS in the system is a rather complicated task that implies quite a number of operations from allocating space to creat
262. recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE recovery media CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 26 Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Once it has been loaded you will see the License Agreement Read the agreement and then mark the appropriate checkbox to accept If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use the program Press Page Up and Page Down to scroll the pert End User License Agreement a a N you SCheat the terms of the agreement click the check box below j i ascent the tenmi in the License Agreement Decline 3 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher In general it enables to run components of the product load drivers for undefined hardware or establish a network connection Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 27 Partitioning Partitioning What would you like to do Backup and Recovery Create Partition PE Aa its proparias Copying and Migration Format Partition Fomai partition to a fle syeiem of your chose Note al dela this pattion cordais wil be geeteg Securty and Optimizati
263. red In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well Apply pending changes 7 Dona ton tmp span 6 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program CE Easting file C Users user Desktop imagesextrafunctionalty_checkarchiveintegrty seb 4 Existing fle C Users user Desktop images extrafunctionalty _checkrecoverydisk_selec 0 Easting file L Users user Desktop images exdtrafunciionaliy_sdi_sectors png has beer 4 Existing file C Users user Desktop images exrafunctionslty_fletransfer_destination pr ICD Existing fle C Users user Desktop images extrafunctionalty_filetransfer_objects png he ICE Existing fie C Users user Desktop images extratunctionalty_fletrensfer_revision png h 10 Existing fie C User user Desktop images extrafunctionalty_fietranster_source png ha Ha Easting file C Ueers userDesktop images extralunctionalty partition information png 01 Existing file C Users user Desktop images extrafunctionalty_sendiogfies png has beer ID Existing file C Users user Desktop images extrafunciionalty_test_surface png has beer E LU Existing file C Users user Desktop images etrafuncionalty_viewiogiles png has been an Egsting file CUsers user Desktop imagesextrafunctionalty volume _eqplorer_destinati ICD Existing file C Users user Desktop images extrafunciionally_volume
264. res of selecied parttions Selected part of Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev i om 4 J in i ii at volume are Fight wolume sire Jo data o data g 217 TGB NTFS 289778 MB E MB 222221 MB ME Result After the operation is completed the unused space between the specified partitions will be redistributed according to your needs Available operation scenarios e Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space of an adjacent partition e Resizing partitions of Apple Boot Camp Redistribute Free Space Wizard The Redistribute Free Space Wizard helps to increase free space on one partition by up taking the on disk unallocated space and the unused space of other partitions By default the wizard adds to the target partition all existing blocks of the free space Besides you can specify partitions to act as a space donor The wizard will automatically recalculate positions of the partitions and move their contents to new locations Startup There are several ways to start the Redistribute Free Space Wizard Launcher e Inthe Main menu select Wizards gt Redistribute Free Space e On the Common Tasks bar click the Redistribute Free Space item of the Wizards menu Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to enlarge Select a partition the size of which will be increased at the expense of other partitions Blocks of the free spa
265. rights reserved 80 Lookin Local Disk E 3 e Sie Date al m 9 2 2009 226 02 AM 38KB 9 2 2009 2 21 28 AM 9 2 2009 5 39 22 PM 7 1 2009 7 37 05 PM CS Name Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Model Comment My hddz Type hiema Hard Disk Drive Total sze 10GB Fla Cart nawla new PBF Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons A N To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter File Backup Restore e Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Chek the check box mext to any He or folder you want to resiore from Name Type Sine Je FB Archive File Level Archive 113 1 KB 115 969 Bytes 3 E E Bec 3 i O Users M user E So Desktop i Y databackupandrescu File 13 KB i dalabackupandrescu Fie 13 5 KB restores iemanddsta File 23 9 KE restoresystemanddata File 34 6 KB To continue click Next Data size lo restore 46 5 KB e A place to restore From the pull down list you can choose whether to restore contents of the backup image to its original location or specify some other one CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 81 Rest
266. rishad at 124147 Started 3 2 2008 at 1244 4 PM Finished al 12 58 38 y Seated 9 2 2009 at 1 08 03 FM Pose Sytem a Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SES Disk Dev Of Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SES Disk Dev OH w C w C NTFS NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S 5051 Disk Dev Off Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev OF t Unallocated 9 Cetec FREE FREE Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Off Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Off 08 es Aromas FREE FREE CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 140 Typical Scenarios This chapter lists a number of the most frequently used scenarios that may be accomplished with the program You can find here useful recommendations and descriptions of operations Backup Scenarios Creating the Backup Capsule Let us take a computer of a rank and file user who is most likely to have only one hard disk with only one partition the only partition is always system Suppose that there is enough free space on the hard disk to create the backup capsule as well It can be created with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard Launcher 1 Click the Manage Backup Capsule item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Selecta place on the disk where the backup
267. rnels to the boot menu the boot ini file to choose the required platform in case your system fails to boot Uniprocessor Multiprocessor or Old legacy PC without ACPI You can later remove them from the menu either under Windows or with Boot Corrector If you ve got a 64 bit operating system no options will be added to the boot menu e Automatic replacement of the boot critical drivers HDD controller PS 2 and USB mouse and keyboard to the default Windows drivers to provide the maximum level of compatibility Once your Windows starts up it will initiate reconfiguration of all Plug n Play devices so we do recommend you to provide the latest drivers for your motherboard and processor at this step as it can considerably improve the overall performance of your system e The option to inject 3rd party drivers to guarantee your system will start up on the new hardware Actually you ve got two options either provide a path to your own driver repository collection of all drivers to your hardware devices located in one folder for the program automatically pick and install only those drivers required for your OS recommended or manually specify drivers critical for the guaranteed startup of your system on the new hardware Adaptive Restore for Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 It is based on the fact that these operating systems do not delete their distributive driver repositories after the setup but simply make them inactive in the Windows Registry
268. rogress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out at the moment Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 222 suboperation progress sfraracon a yJ SOFTWARE SROUP Redistribute partitions y Work tine00 01 15 Time to finish00 00 05 Done 0 77 Mb Read 72 Hb 4 0 Mbs All O Mb Arite 0 0 Hb 0 0 Mb s Overall progress Quick data aoving Flushing system buffers please walt Modifying drive t on hard disk O Checking paraneters Scanning dir structure Scanning data structure may be a few Minutes step i Step 2 o not reset or turn off your computer to avoid the data loss Iperation in progress press ESC or Ctrl C to interrupt operation After completing the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that your system partition is bigger now Creating Dual Boot Systems For Windows computers Release of Windows Vista has given a new impetus to the problem of establishing a dual boot system In this connection we decided to consider two the most frequently used situations a rank and file user may face i e Windows Vista Windows XP and Windows XP Windows Vista Please note that for reasons of better security and system independence these operating systems will be installed on different partitions That is why we need to hide the first system partition before installation of the second OS W
269. ropriate place of a hard disk format it to NTFS and then make it available in the system by assigning a drive letter Express Resize Partitions Wizard to increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition of a hard disk including partitions of Apple Boot Camp Safe Defragmentation Mode to guarantee data loss free defragmentation of any version of NTFS and FAT Smart Backup Wizard to secure system and data with the minimal efforts possible With a unique intelligent work algorithm and a highly intuitive user interface you can easily back up exactly what you need the whole system e mail databases MS Outlook Express Windows Mail media files or office documents of the My Documents folder or any other files and folders Smart Driver Injector to make the process of adding new drivers for P2P operations smooth and easy Support for the latest operating systems from Microsoft Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Backup to an FTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection Selective Restore to easily extract files and folders from a backup image with the Restore Wizard without the need to restore the whole image Scheduling for the File backup to set up a timetable for any file based backup operation thus providing a new level of flexibility Boot Corrector for WinPE to fix most of the system boot problems not only with the Linux and PTS DOS bootable recovery environments but WinP
270. rtion boot record O Modify partition parameters Correct boot parameters boot ini BCD To begin click Next 5 Onthe next page choose the required hard disk from the pull down list if several and then select the Update the MBR executable code option Please choose the hard disk to correct boot problems Please point out the operation lo perform O View ihe MBR Update the MBR executable code O Reorder primary partitions change slots 6 Confirm the operation j A Update the MBR executable code of the Basic Disk 0 40 0 Gb 7 After the operation is completed click the Report button to see a well informative summary page The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dialog Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 169 ae Reporting You have successfully completed boot correction To view the repon on the operations perormed click Report Report Report Paragon Boot Corrections Repon Operations penormed Operation 1 Correct the Master Boot Record Hard disk targeted Basic Disk 0 Slatus Successful Date and Time 2009 Jan 14 Wed 14 01 09 8 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 9 Rebootthe computer Fixing Windows startup ability Let s assume that due to an unknown reason your Windows fails to complete the startu
271. rtitioning Tasks CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 44 E FIA Starting the Express Resize Partitions Wizard to redistribute free space between f Express Resize two adjacent partitions oe Starting the Merge Partitions Wizard to merge adjacent partitions of NTFS FAT Merge Partitions FAT32 file systems Starting the Redistribute Free Space Wizard to redistribute available disk space of S Redistibute Free Space existing partitions lt gt area Patios Starting the Undelete Partitions Wizard to recover accidentally deleted partitions 1074 Wipe Hard Disk or Partition Starting the Wipe Wizard to help destroy all on disk information or only remnants of deleted files directories Copy Tasks ch Starting the One Button Copy Wizard to clone a hard disk with one click J One Button Copy Disk dy Starting the Copy Hard Disk Wizard to copy a hard disk Copy Disk E Copy Partition Starting the Copy Partition Wizard to copy a partition Backup Tasks ab Back up Disk or Partition Starting the Sector Backup Wizard to create an archive of a hard disk or separate partitions Starting the File Backup Wizard to create an archive of particular files and folders Back Up Files 5 O A ne the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard to create resize or delete the backup capsule Starting the Restore Wizard to restore a hard disk separate partition or files from the backup image P2P Adjust O
272. rttion s content after move exacily as t was but wd regure more time The Move Resize dialog offers a number of additional parameters that can also be of help However here we pay attention to the most relevant to fulfill our task 4 Now you have a block of free space sufficient in size to hold a new partition Basic Hard Disk O VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev Vista C Unallocated 158 7 GB NTFS 3441 2GB 5 Create a new partition to install Windows XP To do that please call the context menu for a newly created block of free space right click of the mouse button and launch the Create Partition dialog CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 227 Tool Changes Wizards Hard Disk Partition Archives View Help w cil Hard Disk Manager Disk Vie Are you sure you want to create a new partition on disk 07 U nj You are about to create a new pariton in Unallocated 341 2 GB ares Pease select size te pastion and fle system of the new partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Create new partition as Primary partition Please speciy new partition sine 1439451 7 MB 345 451 MB divo later Please soecty size of free space before the partition 0 OMB 345 437 MB Fiesse specify size of free space ater the pawilon U OMB 343 443 MB Plazas select fle system for new partion NTFS A Plesse enter new volume label New V
273. ry out with the program all operations you need to schedule 3 Call the Save to Scheduler dialog in the Main Menu Tools gt Save to Scheduler Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 125 ala Task name Scheduled Task Please specty how and when would you like to perform the task Shutdown system after camying out the tasios Run the task on 06 02 20 Every 1 deis Do mot nun thee lask after Discard al operations on close 4 Inthe opened dialog enter the required task name and specify the task timetable 5 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation This command is unavailable if there are no operations on the List of Pending Operations Scripting The program actions can also be represented in form of a script The script describes the appropriate operation with macro language commands There is an interpreter utility SCRIPTS exe which is included in the program installation package This utility works in the unattended mode which enables to automate operations Startup You have no need to write a script since the program has a convenient interface for such a task In order to generate a script on the base of the entered parameters of the required operation you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Make sure the virtual mode of execution is enabled 2 Carry out with the program all operations you need to be scripted 3 Call the Generate Script dialog in
274. s XP unaware of each other The rest of the parameters offered by default will do in our case so just complete the wizard and it will automatically find the two operating systems and update the MBR CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 225 Boot menu ootons Normal mode 4 Timeout for booting las used configuration 15 seconds Hidden mode Tima to display the Boot Manager startup massage Chose a hol key for startup Boot Manager 12 Now restart the computer to make sure you have got a dual boot system Traditional way A _ This scenario implies that operating systems will be installed on different partitions to provide better security and system independence Express Launcher Click Switch to Full Scale Launcher in the Express Launcher In the main window select your hard disk on the Disk Map to make a block of free space on it 1 Local Disk E Volume letter El Serial number Volume label 1 5 Partition ID Type Pomay NTFS version File system HTES Volume Size Root entries 32 Partition size Sectors per boot 3 Used space 2 Release some free space not less than 10 GB to install Windows XP from the partition To do that please call the context menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button and launch the Move Resize dialog Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 226 Disk View Scheduled Tasks Archives Help Lo O
275. s located on multiple volumes the way it is recommended by Microsoft to improve the level of database performance and reliability thus providing 100 percent data consistency A N To use VSS it is necessary to have a mounted 300 MB NTFS partition Dynamic Disks As you probably know MS DOS Microsoft Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Vista Server 2003 2008 support four primary partitions per physical hard disk one of which can be extended Certainly there is the possibility to create logical drives within the extended partition Such types of disks are called basic Windows XP Professional Windows 2000 Windows Vista and Windows Server 2003 2008 follow the same strategy You can have a maximum of four primary partitions one of which can be an extended partition with logical drives However these operating systems also introduce a new disk configuration type dynamic disk which must be understood to effectively configure and manage hard disks Dynamic disk is a physical disk that doesn t use partitions or logical drives Instead it contains only dynamic volumes Regardless of what format you use for the file system only Win2K computers can access dynamic volumes directly However computers that aren t running Win2K can access the dynamic volumes remotely when connected to the shared folders over the network Dynamic disks can co exist on a system with basic disks The only limitation is that you cannot mix Basic and Dynamic disks on the same hard
276. s of a partition or a hard disk at the moment of its creation If you roll back your system to the initial state on a regular basis that s exactly what you re looking for But if you want to have multiple backup archives of the same partition reflecting certain time stamps unchanged data will inevitable be CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 29 duplicated in all archives and take additional space on backup media To tackle this issue there has been developed a supplementary technique called Differential Sector Backup A differential archive only contains data changed since the time of creating a full archive which forms a base or a parental image in this case thus considerably saving your system resources It is realized by the exact bit wise comparison of the previous partition s data saved in the parental image with the current data that is actually the partition itself To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials what is very convenient Differential Base to a Sector Backup sunday Monday Tuesday saturday Full Sector Backup Monday restore point Tuesday restore point Saturday restore point A AA This function is only available for single primary and logical partitions Full and Incremental File Backups A full file based archive only contains files and folders It is really efficient when backing up an e mail database or particular d
277. s option if you want the Wizard to burn the data to CD or OVO You will be prompted to choose a CD or DVD RW drive 8 Onthe Choose a Recorder page select a recorder from the list of available devices and then set a volume label by entering it in the appropriate field Select a recorder to burn data to Optiarc Volume label My Data 9 Onthe Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Transfer user data _ SSS Operation progress COT i Time elapsed 00 00 07 Copied so far 5 0 Mb To copy 12 0 Mb Time to finish 00 00 16 Overall progress Creating compllabon image Used burner OVO RW AD 71704 Vendor Optiarc session opening Data burning 11 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 12 Turn off the computer This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 201 Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition The system fails to boot since some files are damaged If you have a backup of the system partition you can recopy these files to make t
278. se then call the popup menu for it and choose the menu item Check Archive Integrity The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation An archive to verify The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any F Show al i E ES tk Type Creation Dae 7 Source Object Sine 92 2009 5 24 27 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware Vihware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 10 amp SUS 5 20 25 AM ew Volume F 4d F af pistava Archive 1131 F 6 2 2005 5 06 03 AM Fisdevel Archive i gt 272009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk L 499 9 9 2 2009 2 21 01 AM Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 10 w F Swich to Fla View Arecheve Fie Chet ade Comment images Backup date 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Total size 113 1 KB 115 869 Bytes Archive size 101 2 KB 103 723 Bytes Fila Care magen FLOOO0000000000000000 archive pfi Base archiva To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description A N To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyrigh
279. se consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 185 4 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Fiesse select a place you would like to restore the archive lo Note that f you select an existing hard disk or partition ts content wil be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev E o Local Disk C 4595 GB NTFS All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 5 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter Tour hard disk after the changes Please specify the size of the restored partition 511998 8719 MB 5171998 ME Please specify are of free space before the partition 0 OMB 503279 MB Please specify size of free space sher the partition D OMB 503279 MB 6 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 7 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree
280. se this option allow the dsk to be copied by third party tools Recording speed SSO SDS mioma Ay Auto recording speed Choose this option to allow the recorder to choose the best EE re ra y Ale system conmensi n options Copy Backup exclude options Boot options dq ala pa a 5 Ami E a He Backup excide poten Speciy a bootable SO image to placa on CD or DVD along with backup data Fle Backup include options mm mam Pa aheri h booted Pu Brava e pa options tee ae bien ie kad ere OT ae TU Soc Y CA pri WOL O o du Dogi TI A Le ar hal E Bont from any CO or DVD S0 image folder Browse for s i mym gm an F older to place ISO images to when CD or DVD 150 maker is used This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during CD DVD burn operations Burn every CD DVD to the end By default the program does not create ISO 9660 compliant burning sessions as it processes data on the fly and can only estimate the resulted session size That s why no third party tool will get access to the recorded data To tackle the issue mark the checkbox to make the program create a standard Disk at Once session It may slow down the burning process as every CD DVD will be recorded up to the end no matter how much actual information to contain Recording speed The user may define how fast a CD DVD will be recorded minimum normal and maximum Besides there is an automatic mode when the program
281. sed during restore lo check the archive imegaty E can stow down he bacioup operation File Backup include options Good compression Provides average speed with the reasonable mage sire n Fina care Seri 5 Tm m Cat fel e e ips options mege ipa Mn i i i Choose this option lo enable splitting the archive to several fies Manimum solt size 2000 MB This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during backup restore operations e Control archive integrity Mark the checkbox to guarantee that all backup images created with the program are 100 percent flawless If you decided not to control the archive integrity the backup operation would take about 3 5 less time e Set image file names automatically Mark the checkbox to make the program automatically set a file name for every volume of a complex backup image Otherwise you will need to do it manually during the backup operation e Compression level From the pull down list you can select the desired compression level for backup images that will be used by default e Enable image splitting Mark the checkbox to automatically split every backup image to volumes of a particular size Splitting images enables to tackle problems caused by a maximum file size limitation of some file systems e Maximum split size With the spinner control you can specify a maximum size for backup volumes Copyright 1994 2010 Parago
282. selected image including e Information on a type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based e Whether the archive is compressed or not e Whether the archive is password protected or not e The date when the archive was created Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 72 The next page i e What to restore displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Whal to restore Pisasse select an archive tem to restore Please select one of the objectis lo restore Nome Type Fle system Sie Used E F Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Model intemal Hard Disk Drive 1068 Local Disk 7 Linux Swap 509 8 MB 4KB Lino Bad 14GB iH 14 Grew Volume F NTFS 24G6 E SP NEW VOLUME E FAT32 14GB File system Linux Et Total size 14GB Used space 58 1 MB Free space 1 3GB To select where to restore the selected objects click Mead Data size to restore 1 4 GB Back Net Cancel If you want to restore the image contents click the Next button In order to cancel click the Cancel button Using the Archive Database To open the Archive Database click the appropriate tab in the Explorer Bar The database window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose
283. sent to the SMTP server which in its turn delivers them to the required recipients The address may be represented as a traditional Internet host name e g mail com or as an IP numeric address e g xxX xXX XXX XX e User e mail address Specify an e mail address that has been assigned by the Internet Service Provider or organization s e mail administrator e My outgoing server requires authentication Activate the option to allow the program to make authentication on the server before sending messages User name Enter the name that will be used to log in to the e mail account Password Enter the password that will be used to access the mail server e Send e mail notification on apply Specify an e mail to send notifications on the carried out operations Send mail in HTML format Activate the option to create messages in the HTML format instead of plain text Send complete report after applying operations Activate the option to create an in depth report on the carried out operations and send it after performing the last operation CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 60 Send graphical view of the disk sub system before and after apply Activate the option to allow the program to attach two pictures of the disk layout made before and after the operation is completed By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Operation IN Dependency Options Operation Dependency Op
284. ses e Boot Corrector to fix most of the system boot problems that can be a result of a human factor program error or a boot virus activity Boot Corrector is only available for the WinPE 2 1 or Linux DOS bootable recovery environment Supported Technologies Along with using innovative technologies from outside Paragon has developed a number of its own original technologies that make its products unique and attractive for customers CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 15 e Paragon Hot Backup technology to back up locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements e Paragon Adaptive Restore technology to successfully migrate a Win2K physical system to a different hardware platform P2P e Paragon Power Shield technology to provide data consistency in case of a hardware malfunction power outages or an operating system failure e Paragon UFSD technology to browse partitions of any file system including hidden and unmounted modify and copy files and folders etc e Paragon Hot Resize technology to enlarge NTFS partitions system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work e Paragon Restore with Shrink technology to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size taking into account only the amount of actual data of the image e Paragon Smart Partition te
285. settings After the operation is completed you can place backup archives into the created backup capsule IAN This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image into the backup capsule please do the following Launcher 1 Create the backup capsule with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard 2 Click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu any of the ways described earlier can also be used here 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe What to back up page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 142 Gick the check box neat to any hard disk deve or partition you want to back up Name Type a A My Computer My Computer Ml F Basc Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev internal Hard Disk Dats First Hard Disk Track Fret Track E E Moner Boot Recors MBR Peal Local Disk E Primary 3 F El Base Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk intemal Hard Disk Dris EM First Hard Disk Track First Track 5 Master Boot Record MBR Local Disk E Prenaty Local Disk 7 Primary E Local Disk 7 Primary F Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS
286. sk Dev 106B E 9 2 2009 5 20 25 AM New Volume F 24GB 9 2 2009 5 11 41 AM Fledewel Archive 113 1 KB F 4 2 2009 5 06 03 AM Fieve Archive 4 KB amp 9 2 2009 2 33 00 AM Local Disk C 499 9GB E 3 2 2009 2 21 01 AM Base Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Vetual S SCSI Disk Dev 10GB l F Archive File Details Comment No comment la avaiable Backup date 9 3 2009 7 36 58 AM Total size 136 8 KB 140 120 Bytes Archive size 1 8 KB 1 865 Bytes File G eec_images DIFF 128964623 220000000 FLOQOOIIO00000000000erchive pli Base archive G arc_images arc_images PBF To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 193 Look in E Archives G Re Y Name Sze Date ia E Local Disk Ej E Archives G E hare disk 2 20 S200 AM Ji are_doc 9 2 2008 5 05 42 AM gt di at images 3912009 1 33 53 AM Ji DIFF128964523380000000 3 3 2009 7 38 58 AM gt a FLOOO0000000000000000 932009 33 58 AM 18 KB 3 3 2009 7 33 53 AM gt Mo comment is avai
287. specific data erasure algorithm that will be used by default during wipe operations The current version of the program provides support of one military standard e US DoD 5220 22 M Getting Information on Disks and Backup Images The program provides some helpful tools to get information on the properties of disks and peculiarities of existing backup images Viewing Disk Properties The main tool to view in depth information on the properties of hard disks is the Disk Map It represents the actual state of the computer s hard disks Generally the hard disks are represented on the map by rectangular bars which also contain small sized bars The small sized bars represent logical disks partitions When you select a large sized bar the Explorer Bar displays information about the disk in a bright graphical form Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 68 Basic Hard Disk 1 FUJITSU MPF3102AT Type Basic Hard Disk Drive Total size 55GB Sectors per track 63 Heads 55 Cylinders 1245 Create an image of the entire disk Back up all the data Ihis hard disk contains All he partons on this disk vall be added tothe archive Restore an image of the entire disk Warning This operation wil delete all the data on this hard dick All the panions will be replaced wilh ones from the image pou have chosen ou may also be asked bo restar pour computer dunng the operasion Copy the entire hard disk Creat
288. stem even when the current operating system cannot boot les S iles S dl Recovery Media Builder anymore Undo the last virtual Cancel the last virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations operation Redo the last virtual operation Cancel the last undo virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations View Changes Display the List of Pending Operations Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 39 Wipe Hard Disk or Destroy all on disk information or only remnants of deleted files directories Partition Express Resize Partitions Increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition mart Backup Back up exactly what you need the whole system e mail databases MS Outlook Express Windows Mail media files or office documents of the My Documents folder or any other files and folders S P2P Adjust OS Make your system bootable on different hardware Synthetic Backup Change any property merge a given differential image with its full image Back up Disk or Partition Create a sector based archive of an entire hard disk or separate partitions split un split compress de compress etc of an existing backup image without carrying out a physical backup operation Manage Backup Capsule Create and manage the backup capsule Check Archive Integrity Perform integrity check for the required backup image Cy clic Backup
289. stration Click Sign in If the user name and password are valid you will get to your account Select My Downloads of the Products section to see what updates are available for you Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 18 7 Select the desired update and click Download Contacting Paragon Technology GmbH If you have any questions about the company products please do not hesitate to contact Paragon Technology GmbH Service Contact Visit Paragon GmbH web site www paragon software com WWW Paragon Registration updates web service software com support Knowledge Base Technical Support kb paragon software com Pre sale information sales paragon software com System Requirements Windows based set of utilities To use the Windows utilities you should install them first But before that please make sure your computer meets the following minimum system requirements e Operating systems Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 Server 2000 2003 2008 and XP SP2 Vista 7 Server 2003 2008 64 bit e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher e Intel Pentium CPU or its equivalent with 300 MHz processor clock speed e 128 MB of RAM 256 recommended e Hard disk drive with 100 MB of available space e SVGA video adapter and monitor Mouse Linux DOS based recovery environment To use the Linux DOS recovery environment on your computer it doesn t matter what operating system is installed please make sure that i
290. sword protection Mot protected F Time VVA 3321 AM Hame ac mege Commen Backed up on 9 1 2009 11 01 06 AM UTE time Extended comment No comment Password protection Mot protected Time 932009 4 01 07 AM Sire 31 MB 32 574 464 Bytes After the operation is completed you receive a new full partition archive It is placed into the specified destination a local or network disk or a CD DVD disc its features defined by the wizard This function is currently unavailable for modification of entire hard disk backups This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 167 Recovery Scenarios Fixing MBR after a boot virus attack Let s assume that the MBR Master Boot Record of your hard disk has been corrupted as a result of a boot virus attack thus your system fails to boot To fix the MBR of your hard disk please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Mor
291. t 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 136 Look in Local Disk C2 J ER Y Marne Size Date a EL i are_new 9 2 2009 2 2604 AM 7 SEKB 9 2 2009 2 21 28 AM u arc_new pim 1KB 9 2 2009 2 26 04 AM are mew 0100p 000 9727KB 9 2 2009 2 21 02 AM arc_new_0100p ptm 11KB 9242009 221002 AM arc_new_0101p 000 83 1 MB 9 2 2009 2 21 10 AM iar new A AIER 9 2 2009 27108 AM swich lo Archive Lest Way Archive Fla Detads Mame Basic Hard Disk 1 Unknown Model Comment Myhdd2 Type intemal Hard Disk Drive Total size 10GB Hie Cuare_nen arc new PBF Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons A N To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Result After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Check Recovery Discs You ve got the ability to check whether backup media created with the program is 100 percent error free and ready to use The Check Recovery Disc Wizard will help you do that Startup There are several ways to start the Check Recovery Disc Wizard Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Tools gt Check Recovery Discs e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Check Recovery Discs item of the Wizards menu Startup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e CD DVD drive Select from the pull dow
292. t meets the following minimum system requirements e IBM AT compatible computer with 486 or higher CPU e 256 MB of RAM e SVGA compatible monitor e Mouse recommended WinPE based recovery environment To use the WinPE based recovery environment on your computer it doesn t matter what operating system is installed please make sure that it meets the following minimum system requirements Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 19 e Intel Pentium III CPU or its equivalent with 1000 MHz processor clock speed e Atleast 512 MB of RAM e SVGA compatible monitor e Mouse recommended Additional requirements There may be additional requirements if you want to use advanced features e Network card to send retrieve data to from a network computer e Recordable CD DVD drive to burn data to compact discs e External USB hard drive to store backup data Installation As we have already mentioned only Windows components of the product require installation So to install Paragon Hard Disk Manager 2010 under Windows please do the following 1 Run Setup Application Click on the MSI file This application will guide you through the process of the program installation The setup utility is compiled with the InstallShield SDK hence it contains the standard user interface and set of installation steps In case there is some previous version of the program installed on the computer the program will offer the user
293. tail By going through steps of the wizard you configure all the necessary settings to launch the backup operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup There are several ways to start the Sector Backup Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Backup and Recovery button and then select Backup Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Back up a Disk or Partition e On the Common Tasks Bar click the Back up a Disk or Partition item of the Wizards menu e Inthe Toolbar click the Back up a Disk or Partition button Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the backup operation e The object to back up You can back up either an entire disk or separate partitions of the disk primary extended or logical In case of backing up an entire disk you ve got the possibility to include into the image such disk elements as the Master Boot Record MBR and the first track of the hard disk This can be very helpful for serious disk recovery procedures Mame Type Ha Li My Computer My Computer 3 E 5 Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Vihwara Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dew intemal Hard Disk Drive J ME 6 Fest Hard Disk Track First Track Ed T Master Boot Record E I Local Disk Primary no Basic
294. tart your computer from this CD make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD first or press F12 during startup to select a bootable device Do not forget to select the newly created partition as destination Windows AP Professional Setup The following list shows the existing partitions and unpartitioned space on this computer Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list To set up Windows AP on the selected item press ENTER To create a partition in the unpartitioned space press To delete the selected partition press BD 236591 AB Disk at Id on bus on atapi A Partition Inactive 08 2 Boot Mani889B8b AB 182417 AB free Partit a LPAL 49685 MB 49659 ME f i 9 So if everything is OK you ve got to have by this moment Windows XP successfully installed Your Windows Vista however is still non bootable To fix this issue you need to launch the Boot Manager Setup wizard To do that please install our program once again but this time in Windows XP to activate Boot Manager A To avoid double installation please use our WinPE recovery environment to activate Boot Manager 10 Click Boot Management and then select Boot Manager in the Express Launcher 11 Set up the Boot Manager wizard The most relevant option here is the possibility to hide other primary partitions except the one selected to boot and it is by all means should be activated to make Windows Vista and Window
295. tegrity Call the popup menu for the selected partition right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Check File System Integrity 3 Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Check wolume C Mo label NTFS for errors Please note that check operation neods exclusive access lo the volume You may be asked to restart your computer to complete the operation Check disk options Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors e Scan for and attempt to recover bad sectors Mark the checkbox to additionally process sectors marked bad in the file system metadata for the purpose of their possible recovery 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check Archive Integrity The program provides the ability to check integrity of a backup image The function allows distinguishing between valid and corrupted images before using them The Check Archive Integrity Wizard will help you do that Startup There are several ways to start the Check Archive Integrity Wizard Launcher Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Setup 135 In the Main Menu select Wizards gt Backup Utilities gt Check Archive Integrity On the Common Tasks Bar click the Check Archive Integrity item of the Wizards menu Select a backup image in the Archive Databa
296. teps to accomplish the operation The hard disk partition to wipe Select a hard disk partition the data of which you want to destroy o Fiesse choose an object for wiping E can be a whole hard dex a single patton or a block of unallocated space You can sel io wipe al data on ihe patton or ony unoccupied space ont ses ine nent sep Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Gta g data Z 232 5 GB NTFS 217GBNTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev td Local Disk 455 568 NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev E tl Unallocated 553 3 G68 e Wipe mode This section enables to switch between two options PA sm dh HE ld a Ee OLA 0 0 a Choose ihis option you want lo Destroy completas sl the daa on ine sejsciad occ Choose this option f you want to destroy the traces of cate that may have been left after an ordinary delete E mm e i Wipe out all data Select the option to irreversibly destroy all on disk data of the selected object Clear wipe free space Select the option to destroy any remnants of deleted files directories left on disk without affecting the used data A The Clear Free Space operation is available only for Logical and Primary partitions of known file systems e Wipe method Here you can select a specific data erasure algorithm or create a customized method by marking the appropriate option F Speci
297. the DOS partitioning scheme a hard disk can have up to four Primary partitions If there is an Extended partition on the disk only three primary partitions are allowed That is why if a dynamic disk contains several simple volumes the program enables to choose the number of primary partitions The rest of them if any will automatically be converted to logical disks within the Extended partition CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 116 En Convert dynamic hard disc to basic f ihe disc has more than four sample volumes the ira three of them wi become primary partitions and the rest will ba converted to the logical ones The hard disk she conven Basic Hard Mk 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev ll New Volume H ino ea MITE id i bo Li The suting base hard dak can have no more than 1 pamary partons Plesse select how many pemary partitions the basic disk should have The program can only process dynamic disks containing solid simple volumes without JN extension Converting GPT to Basic MBR The program allows you to convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volumes into a basic MBR disk while keeping its contents intact In order to convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk into a basic MBR disk you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volumes on the Disk Map 2 Call the Convert to Basic MBR Hard Disk dialog sele
298. the dialog with information about the program A The Main Menu contents available at the moment may vary depending on the selected object Tool Bar The Toolbar provides fast access to the most frequently used operations BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY Back up a hard disk or partition Back up files Restore a disk partition or files Create an NTFS partition and make it ready for work Increase free space on one partition by up taking the unused space of an adjacent partition Copy a hard disk Irreversibly destroy all on partition information Open the Help system Virtual Operations Bar The program supports previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual mode of execution In fact when the virtual mode is enabled the program does not accomplish operations immediately but places them on the List of Pending Operations for later execution The Virtual Operations Bar enables to manage pending operations CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 43 BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY ly Cancel the last virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations Cancel the last undo virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations a Display the List of Pending Operations Y Launch the real execution of virtual operations x Cancel all virtual operations on the List of Pending Operations Virtual mode is an effective way of protection from any troubles s
299. the required operation on the Disk Map The virtual operations are to be available When resizing a FAT16 partition beyond the 2GB limit maximum file system size the partition will automatically be converted to FAT32 The program enables to enlarge NTFS partitions system locked without rebooting Windows and interrupting its work providing 100 percent guarantee that your data is kept intact 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Available operation scenarios e Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other e Shrinking a system partition to increase size of a data partition Converting File System With our program you can change type of the used file system without destroying its data While performing the operation it first checks the current file system for consistency and then verifies whether the on partition data meet the requirements of the desired file system or not After having passed the testing the program re organizes the file system metadata and user files The program enables to convert the following file system types FAT16 gt NTFS FAT32 FAT32 gt NTFS FAT16 NTFS gt FAT16 FAT32 Ext2 gt Ext3 In order to convert a file system you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Convert File System of Partition dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it
300. ting the operation your computer will be automatically restarted back to Windows where you can see that your system partition is bigger now Increasing size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other Let s assume you ve got several partitions on your hard disk After installing a number of resource consuming applications and system updates your system partition has started to suffer from the lack of free space But one of your partitions has a plenty of redundant space That s just enough to make your system partition suffer no more To increase size of a system partition by taking unused space from any other on disk partition please do the following Express Launcher Click Switch to Full Scale Launcher in the Express Launcher 1 In the main window select the required hard disk if several on the Disk Map L 2 Choose a space donor partition and then call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 214 Back Up Partiton Burn Partrton on CD or WD Tools Changes Wizards Hard Disk Partition Archives Vi Restore Partition y i r jr ad Se S ly e Format Partition Disk View Scheduled Tasks Archives Help Delete Partition 2 Mame i z Mor 7 e ue Partitio AEI Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Vidware Virtual 5 SCSI Desk Dev Convert File System p l
301. tion about the archive Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 175 Volume Type File System Bask Disk 0 Size 40 0 Gb Primary NTFS 30Gb 18Gb WinXP Primary NTFS 98Gb 52 8Mb Applicatio Archive details image of the hard disk jam 270508145 20967 1 arc_27050861452086 71 P8F 2008 May 27 Toe 14 54 55 7 On the next page specify a hard disk to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Basic Disk O VMware Viral IDE Hard Drive 40 0 Gb Model VMware Vinual IDE Hard Drive Size 40 0 Gb N volume Type Fie System Size volumelabel Active Hidden Basic Disk 0 Sire 40 0 Gb l Primary NTFS 30Gb WinkP No No Primary NTFS 98Gb Applicaton Mo Mo Primary BackupCapsule 100Gb No label Ye Mo Primary Free 17 2 Gb No C Resize proportionally You can also make the program resize the on disk partitions proportionally if necessary by marking the appropriate checkbox All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 8 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Your partitions afer operations 9 Inthe Progress window you can s
302. tions Edit settings Genera options Backup image ootiens Parton pu A eha Ig im E Copy and backup options Piense select a task to be camed out when one or more of the following operations Aam mi am commiled P m ee o A AAA Y pon Hot processing options leo the task Send emal natfication m during backup option patos Operabon dependency opion ir a os CLA MI a a Adus OS to boot on new hardware Adust OS to boot on virtual hardware Backup partition or disk Boot record comection r ITEC 4 3 Lange irs Vernon Pile system convenon options Copy Backup exciude options Ale Backup exclude options Canoa 5l E F haek od er AA EE ye m 4 een dl Ale Backup includa cotens ps lias ates ee ee e a j 14 diga spbecs Compact SMFT Convert Dorama Disk to Eate LODY PELEGA Lopy partibon Al e la a a e 0 el E Salat nt Cear al Restore defauts J This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account when the Send e mail notification on apply function is enabled By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite the required operation you can choose whether to receive an e mail notification on its completion or not You won t be notified if an operation requires the system restart CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 61 Virtual Mode Options a ES O Edit settings EA E Virtual mod
303. to CD DVD e Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Copy Tasks In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to make a copy of a hard disk or a separate partition Cloning Hard Disks You can clone a hard disk of any file system During the hard disk copying process the program moves controlling records of used partitioning scheme the bootstrap code and on disk partitions That s why this operation cannot be substituted by simply copying all on disk partitions The program offers two wizards that can help to clone a hard disk i e the Copy Hard Disk Wizard and the One Button Copy Wizard Both wizards provide nearly identical functionality but different in the work concept Copy Hard Disk Wizard The Copy Hard Disk Wizard is a traditional like wizard By going through its steps you configure all the necessary settings to launch the copy operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need You need at least two hard disks to carry out this operation Startup There are several ways to start the Copy Hard Disk Wizard Express Launcher e Click the Copying and Migration button and then select Hard Disk Migration Launcher
304. ts reserved 78 e Whether the operation will be performed without rebooting the system The program needs to reboot the system in order to have exclusive access to processing data In a Windows environment this is difficult to achieve because even when all the other applications are closed the system service programs are still running However there is a way to avoid rebooting The mode of processing the backup operation without rebooting is named Hot Processing You can also define specific parameters for the Hot Processing mode e Whether the archive will be split if yes you can set the maximum size for the archive files Splitting images enables to tackle problems caused by a maximum file size limitation of JN some file systems e Whether image file names will be set automatically in complex archives e Whether the OS auxiliary files pagefile sys hyberfil sys will be included in the backup image e Whether the selected partition will be copied in the sector to sector mode including unused sectors as well e Whether backup images stored in the Archive Database will be processed during the backup operation Skipping backups of the Archive Database may considerably decrease the resulted image file and time to carry out the operation By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog You ve got no option to change them directly from this dialog Result After the backup operation
305. tted partition Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata e OS Label Enter a label for the selected partition in the textual field It will later be used for the drive identification OS labels val be displayed m the Boot Managers Hatup menu lo help you boot the required operating system OS labet Windows 7 CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 108 Result As the final step the wizard will offer you to insert a distributive CD DVD of the new operating system and restart the computer to launch the installation procedure The program will update your MBR so most likely you won t be able to start up any of the AN previously installed operating systems Please launch the Boot Manager Setup Wizard after the installation has been completed to fix this issue Available operation scenarios e Creating Dual Boot Systems Moving Resizing Partition The Move Resize Partition function allows you to resize or change location of any partition without destroying its data In order to move resize a partition you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Call the Move Resize Partition dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it e Select in the Main menu Partition gt Move Resize Partition e Onthe Explorer bar click on the current tot
306. tton and then select Wipe Launcher e Inthe Main Menu select Wizards gt Wipe Hard Disk or Partition e On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 1 Select a hard disk the data of which you want to wipe out Plesse choose an object for wiping E can be a whole hard dex a single partition or a block of unalocated space You can set lo pe al data on the parton or onfy unoccupled space on 1 ses ihe neod sep Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Na ej data Z E 282 9GE NTFS M 217GB NTFS Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dev W Local Disk 439 9 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dew E dj Unallocated mm 555 2 GB 2 Onthe Wipe Mode page select the wipe out all the data to irreversible destroy all on disk information Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 238 Wine out al the data Choose this option f you want to destroy completely all the data on the selected abject Gear twine free space this option you want to destroy thee traces of cate that may have been left efter an ordinary delete 3 Onthe Wipe Method page select a specific data erasure algorithm or choose to create a customized one in our case we prefer to use a certified military standard US DoD 5220 22 M le You can see the algorthm desorption and set the level of werficaban on the next page Create your own Dista
307. turned out to be insufficient for your current needs The only way out is to take some space from your Mac partition thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions To increase size of the Windows partition by taking unused space from the Mac partition please do the following Express Launcher 1 Click the Partitioning button and then select Resize Partitions 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 The wizard will automatically select Windows the NTFS file system and Mac the Apple HFS file system partitions of your Boot Camp configuration The wizard val resize space between Local Disk and Wins F C on Retained Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive Select left partion from a pair of adjacent partitions pou would like to resize Right adjacent partition vall be selected aubomatically Retamed Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual IDE Hard Drive On the disk map you can also see the GPT service partition called EFI as well as a 128 megabyte free block between Mac and Windows partitions made with Boot Camp It s just for your information 4 Increase size of your Windows partition with the slider or manually by entering the required value Please note when you change size of one partition the size of the other will be changed as well thus redistributing the unused space between the partitions Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 221
308. twork as a backup destination D Backup Capsule on Hard Desk O Gl Network places e Map a network disk where your archives are placed Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 181 Map to dive leter i Fr NL Ey e Mabe pamaen connection Arc Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary You can also map a network disk with Network Configurator e Choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image lt Hara Size Clate HCD Deve E PARAGON a E Boot 0x Mat Backup Sorags Vserrer usa exchange Z Sar 200508103150968 5 28 2008 2 37 21 AM OD arc _280508103150068 PBF 21 5KB 5 28 2008 2 37 24 AM arc_280508103150968_00kpp 000 IGB 5 28 2008 2 37 10 AM are 200508103150968 00006 cfm 17 1 KB 5 28 2008 2 37 07 AM El Archive Hie Detads Name Basic Hard Disk 0 Unknown Model Comment Backup of My Hard Disk Type Basc Hard Disk Drive Total size 40 GE File Zame 280508 103 150562 er
309. u item Downgrade NTFS Version 3 Decrease version of the selected NTFS partition by selecting the one you need from the pull down list lees Are you sure you wam to downgrade NTFS version for volume C Curent NTFS version is 3 01 Windows XP 1 O02 Windows NT 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Mount Archive The program provides the ability to assign a drive letter to a partition backup image As a result of the operation you will get a new read only partition in the system to easily browse through its contents and copy the required information even with the standard Windows tools Assign Drive Letter In order to mount an archive you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a backup image in the Archive Database 2 Call the Mount Archive dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Archives gt Mount the Selected Archive Onthe Explorer bar select the Mount Archive item Call the popup menu for the selected image right click of the mouse button then select the menu item Mount the Selected Archive 3 Specify a drive letter for the selected backup image Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Eam Assign a drive letter This allows access to the volume by using the drive letter assigned The assognmmeni is not recomm
310. up of your hard disk on a remote backup server That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a network drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our WinPE recovery media Recovery Media Builder can help you prepare the Linux DOS or WinPE recovery environment either on a CD DVD disc or a thumb drive To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Once it has been loaded read the agreement and then mark the appropriate checkbox to accept CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved Press Page Up and Page Down to scroll the text End User License agreement Ea PARAGON Technologie Gm H Syitemprogrammienng Heinrich von Stepran S5r 5 e 79100 Freiburg Germany and You as enc user you accepi the terms of the agreement click the check box below f accept the tema in the License Agreement If you do not agree with any conditions stated there you won t be able to use the program 3 Once you accept the agreement you will see the Universal Application Launcher Select the Restore Wizard 4 Onthe Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the Browse for Archive page you need to specify the required backup image So you should take the following steps to do that e Select Ne
311. us phases of the backup process It can be particularly useful when imaging systems with high availability requirements MS SQL MS Exchange etc since it enables to create a consistent snapshot even as the data is currently modified The point is to provide a coherent state of all open files and databases involved in a backup taking into account that applications may still keep writing to disks Actually the backup process consists of two phases the preparation phase snapshot and the data copying phase There are three points of the backup when external commands programs can be launched e Execute at the beginning of the backup process before taking a snapshot Here you can specify an executable file that will help you to prepare running applications for taking a snapshot It may contain specific commands programs to delete unnecessary files suspend services flush transactions or caches etc Everything depends on the used applications e Execute after taking a snapshot Here you can specify an executable file that will run just after taking a snapshot It may contain specific commands programs e g to resume the previously suspended services etc Everything depends on the used applications e Execute after finishing the backup process Here you can specify an executable file that will run after the backup process has been accomplished It may include commands programs that will move the backup image to a particular location etc Copyri
312. ve La Filtered archive 7 Differential archive i Incremental archive File increment to a partition archive To easily manage images in the Archive Database the program provides the following functionality BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY S Refresh the contents of the database at Show only existing archives Fih Add the selected archive to the database Ek Delete the selected archive from the database Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 71 Besides you may filter backup archives to decide whether to show only file partition or hard disk archives To do that please select the required filter in the left top corner of the page Browse for Archive Please select an achive bo restore amp E ke Show ab l k b i Source Object 7 Master Boot Reco F 18 35 Master Boot Reco LA 20 05 2008 160643 File level Archive F 20 05 2008 160548 Fielevel Archive Ez 14 12 2007 200219 Master Boot Reco By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window 5 Restore Wizard Browse for Archive Please select an archrve to restore Lock in Local Disk C le i x w Name Se Date z Local Disk C E ue arc_new 8 2 2009 2 71 21 AM SERB 922009 2 21 20 AM E BEES AAA A Comment My hdd Type intemal Hard Disk Drive Total sze 1068 Fie Cverc_new are_new PEF The section below i e Archive File Details displays a short description of the
313. ver Lost Partitions Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the undelete partition operation e Free blocks to scan for lost partitions Choose a free block from a tree like list of available hard disks Chek ihe check box next to any hard disk drive or free block you want to examine Mame Type 3 EX My Computer My Computer y Base Hard Disk 3 Wise Vibar Vetuel 5 SCS Disk Dev intemal Hard Di Unallocated E E Free Spa The summary sre of fragment s to analyze la 159 GB e Search method By default the wizard selects the fastest search method for your operating system In most cases that will do to find any accidentally deleted partition However if you re under Windows XP for instance the Conventional Search option is selected but the deleted partition you re looking for has been created with the Disk Management utility under Vista the wizard won t be able to find this partition unless you manually select the appropriate option Quick Search for Partitions Created by Vista or Later OS Moreover if the wizard still fails to find the partition you need you can select the Thorough Search option to scan every single sector in the specified search area to get the most accurate results Choose how to look for the deleted partitions Quick search for partons created by Vista or later OS a Conventional search Thorough search y Show file systems search options Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Softwa
314. view l NTFS Winxp New size 1859 3067 Mb lt 3067 lt Mb Free space before 0 1208 Mb A Free space aher 0 1208 Mb ee pa 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process CopyrightO 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 179 View changes on Your partitions before operations Your partitions after operations 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Restore partition or disk ALLE Operation progress rer Ss J Time elapsed 00 01 10 Time to finish 00 06 36 Copied sofar 290 0 Mb Read so far 366 0 Mb 5 7 Mbs To copy 1 5Gb Write so far 366 0 Mb 52 3 Mb s Overall progresa ELECE T Restore Primary parinion 0 disk 0 from file 7 BP280508 PRF Data writing 12 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery environment A N To make a Win2K operating system bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from a network drive Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a back
315. w Sectors 1 Properties Data F 200 GB NTFS 6 At first shift the right edge of the partition to the right then do the same with the left edge Make sure the partition size has been left unchanged Are you sure you want to move resize volume F You ara about to move rasiza NTFS voume Data F Basic Hard Disk 0 Hord Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtus S SCSI Disk Dev gt L ki W Unallocated 115 E Volume size 143 871 16 MB we 34 MB 266 794 MB Free space before 121 923 00 MB w Obytes 265 700 04 MB Free space after 0 Bytes tfe Obytes 265 700 04 ME Sector to sdo move Select this option to move partion areas that dant contain any date This allows you to keep the partitions content after move exactly as E was but wi meguire more time 7 Now you can resize the extended partition to take the block of free space out of it Call the context menu for it right click of the mouse button to launch the Move Resize dialog 8 Inthe opened dialog shift the edge of the extended partition to the right Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 216 O Are you sure you want to moveresize extended partition on disk 07 Basie Hard Disk 0 Aimar VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev L g Data F Wo TEMP 6 69
316. xample developing a specific project on a day to day basis and having to make a backup every evening so as not to lose the valuable data you will really appreciate when this kind of routine operations will be carried out automatically without your participation Another aspect of any automation process is that it allows an optimization of your computer s work load This is especially important when operations require a considerable amount of computer resources processor time memory and more A number of tasks which can decrease the performance can be run during the night or whenever the computer has the least work load to perform The program has a special tool for scheduling You can set out a timetable for any operation and it will start at a specified time without interrupting your current activity Windows Components In the given section you can find all the information necessary to successfully work with the Windows version of the product Interface Overview This chapter introduces the graphical interface of the program The design of the interface precludes any mistake being made on the part of the user Most operations are performed through the system of wizards Buttons and menus are accompanied by easy understandable icons Nevertheless any problems that might occur while managing the program can be tackled by reading this very chapter General Layout When you start the program the first component that is displayed is called
317. y Slot Updating MBR The program enables to overwrite the current bootable code in the MBR Master Boot Record by the standard bootstrap code This can help to repair a corrupted bootable code of a hard disk resulted from a boot virus attack or a malfunction of boot management software In order to update MBR of a hard disk you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Call the Update MBR dialog to set up the operation There are several ways to do it Select in the Main Menu Hard Disk gt Update MBR Call the popup menu for the selected hard disk right click of the mouse button on the Disk Map then select the menu item Update MBR EA gt Are you sure you wani to update master boot record Cured MBR contents for hard disk number 0 wall be lost after the operation Tour computer may no longer boot comecily Na 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Converting Dynamic MBR to Basic The program allows you to convert a dynamic MBR disk containing simple volumes into a basic one while keeping its contents intact In order to convert a dynamic MBR disk into basic you should take the following steps Launcher 1 Select a dynamic MBR disk containing simple volumes on the Disk Map 2 Call the Convert to Basic dialog selecting in the Main Menu Hard Disk gt Convert to Basic 3 Set the required number of primary partitions if necessary According to
318. y when partion is locked ad Qu on Pn a pra ae a iene arga Senne S a eee Tog oS Lge EI C f l ma Fi 2 AA A A ad pa me ot a mal a ae e In this section you may configure the hot processing mode e Enable hot processing Mark the checkbox to enable the so called hot data processing mode that is specially designed to process data without restarting your operating system e Hot processing technology From the pull down list you can select the required hot processing technology e Always use hot processing Select the option to process partitions without making them locked Thus you will be able to keep working with them as usual e Use hot processing only when partition is locked Select the option to use the hot processing only when partitions are locked and cannot be processed without restarting the computer Please keep in mind that once you start any operation on a partition in this mode it will automatically be locked by the program thus you won t be able to keep working with it as usual e Hot processing temporary drive Here you can select a disk drive that will be used to store the temporary hot backup data by default C e Attempts to start VSS Here you can set how many attempts to start Microsoft VSS the program is to do before automatically rebooting the system and accomplishing the operation in a special boot up mode e Timeout between attempts in seconds Here you can set a time period between different att
319. ycic backup the Wizard can perform Please choose the one you would lie io carry oul Cyckc Backup Type Base type Every image made during the operation wil be created as a complete base image Diferential type Every first image wil be made as a complete base image al the others will be dferentiated from E A d ferential backup only contains changes in the partition s contents wih respec lo a complete image e Base type Every image created during the operation will be made as a full archive e Differential type Every first image will be made as a full base archive and all the others will be differentiated from it This operation requires much less space thus considerably saving your system resources By setting the Maximum disk space to store images and the Maximum number of images to store parameters you may define when the operation will be cycled That means that on exceeding these two parameters the Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 164 oldest archives will be automatically overwritten if choosing the Differential type only differential images will be overwritten Manamum disk space lo store images 10000 MB Maximum numberof images to store 2 9 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process The operation will run according to the set timetable The resulted backup images will be placed into
320. ystem of the appropriate partition Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 5051 Disk Dev Local Disk C 499 3 GB NTFS Large sized bars display the following information about physical disks e Manufacturer e Model Small sized bars display the following information about logical disks e Serial number e Drive letter e Total size e File system Furthermore it is possible to estimate the used disk space by looking at the size of the bar s shaded area The program offers to choose from several types of the disk layout scaling It s done especially to increase the program usability For instance if you ve got a high capacity hard drive containing both very large more than 100 GB and rather small less than 10 GB partitions you can select the logarithmic type to make all partitions readable otherwise selecting the linear type you won t be able to see small partitions at all but thing strips On the other hand if the proportional disk layout is critical for you the linear type is exactly what you need Copyright 1994 2010 Paragon Software Group All rights reserved 46 Nevertheless there s a compromise solution linear scaling with the minimal limit to small partitions So if a partition is too small it will remain readable Just click on the arrow icon on the top right side of the Disk Map to select the desired scaling type Linear Linear Scaling Min Width Lo Al mic Scaling Lima Et4 D

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Samsung AC026FB1DEH Manual de Usuario  Behringer A500 Reference Amplifier User Manual  GPS 2.0 SG002 GPS 3.0 SG003  DELL Vostro 270  Documento di valutazione dei rischi per la sicurezza e la salute sul  FAQ: Le RISPOSTE alle tue DOMANDE (file 85Kb)  Manual de Instalacion para el Usario  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file